mirror of
https://github.com/samba-team/samba.git
synced 2025-03-01 04:58:35 +03:00
Regenerate docs
(This used to be commit 5a2aaa3d5b039776314067aee953921e7865dc4d)
This commit is contained in:
parent
71a53d0e4d
commit
27aef6855f
Binary file not shown.
31426
docs/Samba-Developers-Guide.ps
Normal file
31426
docs/Samba-Developers-Guide.ps
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
50067
docs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.ps
Normal file
50067
docs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.ps
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1251"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1336"
|
||||
>8.1. Setup your <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
@ -111,26 +111,57 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> ads server = your.kerberos.server</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You do *not* need a smbpasswd file, and older clients will
|
||||
be authenticated as if "security = domain", although it won't do any harm
|
||||
be authenticated as if <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>security = domain</B
|
||||
>,
|
||||
although it won't do any harm
|
||||
and allows you to have local users not in the domain.
|
||||
I expect that the above required options will change soon when we get better
|
||||
active directory integration.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1262"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1349"
|
||||
>8.2. Setup your <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/krb5.conf</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The minimal configuration for krb5.conf is:</P
|
||||
>The minimal configuration for <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>krb5.conf</TT
|
||||
> is:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
@ -140,10 +171,43 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
}</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Test your config by doing a "kinit USERNAME@REALM" and making sure that
|
||||
>Test your config by doing a <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>kinit <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>USERNAME</VAR
|
||||
>@<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>REALM</VAR
|
||||
></KBD
|
||||
> and making sure that
|
||||
your password is accepted by the Win2000 KDC. </P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE: The realm must be uppercase. </P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The realm must be uppercase. </P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You also must ensure that you can do a reverse DNS lookup on the IP
|
||||
address of your KDC. Also, the name that this reverse lookup maps to
|
||||
@ -151,13 +215,28 @@ must either be the netbios name of the KDC (ie. the hostname with no
|
||||
domain attached) or it can alternatively be the netbios name
|
||||
followed by the realm. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The easiest way to ensure you get this right is to add a /etc/hosts
|
||||
entry mapping the IP address of your KDC to its netbios name. If you
|
||||
don't get this right then you will get a "local error" when you try
|
||||
to join the realm.</P
|
||||
>The easiest way to ensure you get this right is to add a
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/hosts</TT
|
||||
> entry mapping the IP address of your KDC to
|
||||
its netbios name. If you don't get this right then you will get a
|
||||
"local error" when you try to join the realm.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If all you want is kerberos support in smbclient then you can skip
|
||||
straight to step 5 now. Step 3 is only needed if you want kerberos
|
||||
straight to <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#ADS-TEST-SMBCLIENT"
|
||||
>Test with smbclient</A
|
||||
> now.
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#ADS-CREATE-MACHINE-ACCOUNT"
|
||||
>Creating a computer account</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
and <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#ADS-TEST-SERVER"
|
||||
>testing your servers</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
is only needed if you want kerberos
|
||||
support for smbd and winbindd.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -165,22 +244,22 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1273"
|
||||
NAME="ADS-CREATE-MACHINE-ACCOUNT"
|
||||
>8.3. Create the computer account</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As a user that has write permission on the Samba private directory
|
||||
(usually root) run:
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>net ads join</B
|
||||
<KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>net ads join</KBD
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1277"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1373"
|
||||
>8.3.1. Possible errors</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -205,18 +284,18 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1285"
|
||||
NAME="ADS-TEST-SERVER"
|
||||
>8.4. Test your server setup</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On a Windows 2000 client try <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>net use * \\server\share</B
|
||||
>On a Windows 2000 client try <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>net use * \\server\share</KBD
|
||||
>. You should
|
||||
be logged in with kerberos without needing to know a password. If
|
||||
this fails then run <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>klist tickets</B
|
||||
this fails then run <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>klist tickets</KBD
|
||||
>. Did you get a ticket for the
|
||||
server? Does it have an encoding type of DES-CBC-MD5 ? </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -225,20 +304,23 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1290"
|
||||
NAME="ADS-TEST-SMBCLIENT"
|
||||
>8.5. Testing with smbclient</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On your Samba server try to login to a Win2000 server or your Samba
|
||||
server using smbclient and kerberos. Use smbclient as usual, but
|
||||
specify the -k option to choose kerberos authentication.</P
|
||||
specify the <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-k</VAR
|
||||
> option to choose kerberos authentication.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1293"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1390"
|
||||
>8.6. Notes</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Unicode/Charsets"
|
||||
HREF="unicode.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="SWAT - The Samba Web Admininistration Tool"
|
||||
HREF="swat.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="PART"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
HREF="swat.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -83,101 +83,187 @@ CLASS="TOC"
|
||||
>Table of Contents</B
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23. <A
|
||||
>25. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html"
|
||||
>SWAT - The Samba Web Admininistration Tool</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3976"
|
||||
>SWAT Features and Benefits</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3979"
|
||||
>The SWAT Home Page</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3982"
|
||||
>Global Settings</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3985"
|
||||
>The SWAT Wizard</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3988"
|
||||
>Share Settings</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3991"
|
||||
>Printing Settings</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3994"
|
||||
>The Status Page</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="swat.html#AEN3997"
|
||||
>The Password Change Page</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26. <A
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html"
|
||||
>Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html#AEN4012"
|
||||
>Planning and Getting Started</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.1.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html#AEN4015"
|
||||
>Objectives</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.1.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html#AEN4018"
|
||||
>Steps In Migration Process</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html#AEN4021"
|
||||
>Managing Samba-3 Domain Control</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
>Samba performance issues</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3443"
|
||||
>27.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4041"
|
||||
>Comparisons</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3449"
|
||||
>27.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4047"
|
||||
>Socket options</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3456"
|
||||
>27.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4054"
|
||||
>Read size</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3461"
|
||||
>27.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4059"
|
||||
>Max xmit</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3466"
|
||||
>27.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4064"
|
||||
>Log level</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3469"
|
||||
>27.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4067"
|
||||
>Read raw</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3474"
|
||||
>27.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4072"
|
||||
>Write raw</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.8. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3478"
|
||||
>27.8. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4076"
|
||||
>Slow Clients</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.9. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3482"
|
||||
>27.9. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4080"
|
||||
>Slow Logins</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>23.10. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN3485"
|
||||
>27.10. <A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html#AEN4083"
|
||||
>Client tuning</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24. <A
|
||||
>28. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html"
|
||||
>Portability</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN3525"
|
||||
>28.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN4127"
|
||||
>HPUX</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN3531"
|
||||
>28.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN4133"
|
||||
>SCO Unix</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN3535"
|
||||
>28.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN4137"
|
||||
>DNIX</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN3564"
|
||||
>28.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN4166"
|
||||
>RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN3570"
|
||||
>28.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN4172"
|
||||
>AIX</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>24.5.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN3572"
|
||||
>28.5.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="portability.html#AEN4174"
|
||||
>Sequential Read Ahead</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -185,156 +271,161 @@ HREF="portability.html#AEN3572"
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25. <A
|
||||
>29. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html"
|
||||
>Samba and other CIFS clients</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3590"
|
||||
>29.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4196"
|
||||
>Macintosh clients?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3599"
|
||||
>29.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4205"
|
||||
>OS2 Client</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3601"
|
||||
>29.2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4207"
|
||||
>How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
|
||||
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3616"
|
||||
>29.2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4222"
|
||||
>How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
|
||||
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.2.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3625"
|
||||
>29.2.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4231"
|
||||
>Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
|
||||
is used as a client?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.2.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3629"
|
||||
>29.2.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4235"
|
||||
>How do I get printer driver download working
|
||||
for OS/2 clients?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3639"
|
||||
>29.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4245"
|
||||
>Windows for Workgroups</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3641"
|
||||
>29.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4247"
|
||||
>Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.3.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3646"
|
||||
>29.3.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4252"
|
||||
>Delete .pwl files after password change</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.3.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3651"
|
||||
>29.3.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4257"
|
||||
>Configure WfW password handling</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.3.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3655"
|
||||
>29.3.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4261"
|
||||
>Case handling of passwords</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.3.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3660"
|
||||
>29.3.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4266"
|
||||
>Use TCP/IP as default protocol</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3663"
|
||||
>29.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4269"
|
||||
>Windows '95/'98</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>25.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3679"
|
||||
>29.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4285"
|
||||
>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>29.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN4302"
|
||||
>Windows NT 3.1</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26. <A
|
||||
>30. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html"
|
||||
>How to compile SAMBA</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3706"
|
||||
>30.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4323"
|
||||
>Access Samba source code via CVS</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.1.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3708"
|
||||
>30.1.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4325"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.1.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3713"
|
||||
>30.1.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4330"
|
||||
>CVS Access to samba.org</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3749"
|
||||
>30.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4366"
|
||||
>Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3755"
|
||||
>30.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4372"
|
||||
>Building the Binaries</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3783"
|
||||
>30.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4400"
|
||||
>Compiling samba with Active Directory support</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3812"
|
||||
>30.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4429"
|
||||
>Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.4.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3822"
|
||||
>30.4.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4439"
|
||||
>Starting from inetd.conf</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>26.4.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3851"
|
||||
>30.4.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="compiling.html#AEN4469"
|
||||
>Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -342,128 +433,69 @@ HREF="compiling.html#AEN3851"
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27. <A
|
||||
>31. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html"
|
||||
>Reporting Bugs</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3874"
|
||||
>31.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN4500"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3884"
|
||||
>31.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN4510"
|
||||
>General info</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3890"
|
||||
>31.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN4516"
|
||||
>Debug levels</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3907"
|
||||
>31.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN4536"
|
||||
>Internal errors</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3917"
|
||||
>31.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN4550"
|
||||
>Attaching to a running process</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>27.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3920"
|
||||
>31.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN4558"
|
||||
>Patches</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28. <A
|
||||
>32. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"
|
||||
>The samba checklist</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3943"
|
||||
>32.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4581"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3948"
|
||||
>32.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4586"
|
||||
>Assumptions</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3958"
|
||||
>Tests</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3960"
|
||||
>Test 1</A
|
||||
>32.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4596"
|
||||
>The tests</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3966"
|
||||
>Test 2</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3972"
|
||||
>Test 3</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3987"
|
||||
>Test 4</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3992"
|
||||
>Test 5</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3998"
|
||||
>Test 6</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4006"
|
||||
>Test 7</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.8. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4032"
|
||||
>Test 8</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.9. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4049"
|
||||
>Test 9</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.10. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4057"
|
||||
>Test 10</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.3.11. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4063"
|
||||
>Test 11</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>28.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4068"
|
||||
>32.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN4697"
|
||||
>Still having troubles?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -506,7 +538,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="speed.html"
|
||||
HREF="swat.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -526,7 +558,7 @@ VALIGN="top"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Samba performance issues</TD
|
||||
>SWAT - The Samba Web Admininistration Tool</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -81,15 +81,39 @@ be taken as the fast track guide to implementing browsing across subnets
|
||||
and / or across workgroups (or domains). WINS is the best tool for resolution
|
||||
of NetBIOS names to IP addesses. WINS is NOT involved in browse list handling
|
||||
except by way of name to address mapping.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note: MS Windows 2000 and later can be configured to operate with NO NetBIOS
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>MS Windows 2000 and later can be configured to operate with NO NetBIOS
|
||||
over TCP/IP. Samba-3 and later also supports this mode of operation.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN130"
|
||||
NAME="AEN174"
|
||||
>2.1. Discussion</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -101,29 +125,63 @@ messaging to affect browse list management. When running NetBIOS over
|
||||
TCP/IP this uses UDP based messaging. UDP messages can be broadcast or unicast.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Normally, only unicast UDP messaging can be forwarded by routers. The
|
||||
"remote announce" parameter to smb.conf helps to project browse announcements
|
||||
to remote network segments via unicast UDP. Similarly, the "remote browse sync"
|
||||
parameter of smb.conf implements browse list collation using unicast UDP.</P
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
parameter to smb.conf helps to project browse announcements
|
||||
to remote network segments via unicast UDP. Similarly, the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote browse sync</B
|
||||
> parameter of <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
implements browse list collation using unicast UDP.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Secondly, in those networks where Samba is the only SMB server technology
|
||||
wherever possible nmbd should be configured on one (1) machine as the WINS
|
||||
server. This makes it easy to manage the browsing environment. If each network
|
||||
segment is configured with it's own Samba WINS server, then the only way to
|
||||
get cross segment browsing to work is by using the "remote announce" and
|
||||
the "remote browse sync" parameters to your smb.conf file.</P
|
||||
get cross segment browsing to work is by using the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
> and the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote browse sync</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
parameters to your <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If only one WINS server is used for an entire multi-segment network then
|
||||
the use of the "remote announce" and the "remote browse sync" parameters
|
||||
should NOT be necessary.</P
|
||||
the use of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
> and the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote browse sync</B
|
||||
> parameters should NOT be necessary.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As of Samba-3 WINS replication is being worked on. The bulk of the code has
|
||||
>As of Samba 3 WINS replication is being worked on. The bulk of the code has
|
||||
been committed, but it still needs maturation.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Right now samba WINS does not support MS-WINS replication. This means that
|
||||
when setting up Samba as a WINS server there must only be one nmbd configured
|
||||
as a WINS server on the network. Some sites have used multiple Samba WINS
|
||||
servers for redundancy (one server per subnet) and then used "remote browse
|
||||
sync" and "remote announce" to affect browse list collation across all
|
||||
servers for redundancy (one server per subnet) and then used
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote browse sync</B
|
||||
> and <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
to affect browse list collation across all
|
||||
segments. Note that this means clients will only resolve local names,
|
||||
and must be configured to use DNS to resolve names on other subnets in
|
||||
order to resolve the IP addresses of the servers they can see on other
|
||||
@ -140,7 +198,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN139"
|
||||
NAME="AEN193"
|
||||
>2.2. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
|
||||
dependable browsing using Samba</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
@ -157,7 +215,11 @@ well as name lookups are done by UDP broadcast. This isolates name
|
||||
resolution to the local subnet, unless LMHOSTS is used to list all
|
||||
names and IP addresses. In such situations Samba provides a means by
|
||||
which the samba server name may be forcibly injected into the browse
|
||||
list of a remote MS Windows network (using the "remote announce" parameter).</P
|
||||
list of a remote MS Windows network (using the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
> parameter).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Where a WINS server is used, the MS Windows client will use UDP
|
||||
unicast to register with the WINS server. Such packets can be routed
|
||||
@ -185,14 +247,23 @@ will annoy users because they will have to put up with protracted
|
||||
inability to use the network services.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba supports a feature that allows forced synchonisation
|
||||
of browse lists across routed networks using the "remote
|
||||
browse sync" parameter in the smb.conf file. This causes Samba
|
||||
to contact the local master browser on a remote network and
|
||||
of browse lists across routed networks using the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote
|
||||
browse sync</B
|
||||
> parameter in the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> file.
|
||||
This causes Samba to contact the local master browser on a remote network and
|
||||
to request browse list synchronisation. This effectively bridges
|
||||
two networks that are separated by routers. The two remote
|
||||
networks may use either broadcast based name resolution or WINS
|
||||
based name resolution, but it should be noted that the "remote
|
||||
browse sync" parameter provides browse list synchronisation - and
|
||||
based name resolution, but it should be noted that the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote
|
||||
browse sync</B
|
||||
> parameter provides browse list synchronisation - and
|
||||
that is distinct from name to address resolution, in other
|
||||
words, for cross subnet browsing to function correctly it is
|
||||
essential that a name to address resolution mechanism be provided.
|
||||
@ -207,21 +278,40 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN149"
|
||||
>2.3. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN207"
|
||||
>2.3. Use of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Remote Announce</B
|
||||
> parameter</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "remote announce" parameter of smb.conf can be used to forcibly ensure
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
> parameter of
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> can be used to forcibly ensure
|
||||
that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network.
|
||||
The syntax of the "remote announce" parameter is:
|
||||
The syntax of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
> parameter is:
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> remote announce = a.b.c.d [e.f.g.h] ...</PRE
|
||||
> remote announce = <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>a.b.c.d [e.f.g.h]</VAR
|
||||
> ...</PRE
|
||||
>
|
||||
_or_
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> remote announce = a.b.c.d/WORKGROUP [e.f.g.h/WORKGROUP] ...</PRE
|
||||
> remote announce = <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>a.b.c.d/WORKGROUP [e.f.g.h/WORKGROUP]</VAR
|
||||
> ...</PRE
|
||||
>
|
||||
|
||||
where:
|
||||
@ -231,7 +321,14 @@ where:
|
||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>a.b.c.d and e.f.g.h</DT
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>a.b.c.d</VAR
|
||||
> and
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>e.f.g.h</VAR
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>is either the LMB (Local Master Browser) IP address
|
||||
@ -246,7 +343,10 @@ undesirable but may be necessary if we do NOT know
|
||||
the IP address of the remote LMB.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>WORKGROUP</DT
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>WORKGROUP</VAR
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>is optional and can be either our own workgroup
|
||||
@ -265,30 +365,49 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN163"
|
||||
>2.4. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN230"
|
||||
>2.4. Use of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Remote Browse Sync</B
|
||||
> parameter</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "remote browse sync" parameter of smb.conf is used to announce to
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote browse sync</B
|
||||
> parameter of
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> is used to announce to
|
||||
another LMB that it must synchronise it's NetBIOS name list with our
|
||||
Samba LMB. It works ONLY if the Samba server that has this option is
|
||||
simultaneously the LMB on it's network segment.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The syntax of the "remote browse sync" parameter is:
|
||||
>The syntax of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote browse sync</B
|
||||
> parameter is:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>remote browse sync = a.b.c.d</PRE
|
||||
>remote browse sync = <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>a.b.c.d</VAR
|
||||
></PRE
|
||||
>
|
||||
|
||||
where a.b.c.d is either the IP address of the remote LMB or else is the network broadcast address of the remote segment.</P
|
||||
where <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>a.b.c.d</VAR
|
||||
> is either the IP address of the remote LMB or else is the network broadcast address of the remote segment.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN168"
|
||||
NAME="AEN241"
|
||||
>2.5. Use of WINS</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -312,7 +431,11 @@ of all names that have registered the NetLogon service name_type. This saves
|
||||
broadcast traffic and greatly expedites logon processing. Since broadcast
|
||||
name resolution can not be used across network segments this type of
|
||||
information can only be provided via WINS _or_ via statically configured
|
||||
"lmhosts" files that must reside on all clients in the absence of WINS.</P
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>lmhosts</TT
|
||||
> files that must reside on all clients in the
|
||||
absence of WINS.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>WINS also serves the purpose of forcing browse list synchronisation by all
|
||||
LMB's. LMB's must synchronise their browse list with the DMB (domain master
|
||||
@ -330,8 +453,15 @@ machines that have not registered with a WINS server will fail name to address
|
||||
lookup attempts by other clients and will therefore cause workstation access
|
||||
errors.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To configure Samba as a WINS server just add "wins support = yes" to the
|
||||
smb.conf file [globals] section.</P
|
||||
>To configure Samba as a WINS server just add
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins support = yes</B
|
||||
> to the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
file [globals] section.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To configure Samba to register with a WINS server just add
|
||||
"wins server = a.b.c.d" to your smb.conf file [globals] section.</P
|
||||
@ -351,7 +481,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN179"
|
||||
NAME="AEN255"
|
||||
>2.6. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -394,7 +524,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN187"
|
||||
NAME="AEN263"
|
||||
>2.7. Name Resolution Order</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -74,18 +74,18 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="BUGREPORT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 27. Reporting Bugs</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 31. Reporting Bugs</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3874"
|
||||
>27.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4500"
|
||||
>31.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The email address for bug reports for stable releases is <A
|
||||
HREF="samba@samba.org"
|
||||
HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>samba@samba.org</A
|
||||
>.
|
||||
@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3884"
|
||||
>27.2. General info</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4510"
|
||||
>31.2. General info</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Before submitting a bug report check your config for silly
|
||||
@ -135,8 +135,7 @@ you've misconfigured something and run testparm to test your config
|
||||
file for correct syntax.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Have you run through the <A
|
||||
HREF="Diagnosis.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
HREF="diagnosis.html"
|
||||
>diagnosis</A
|
||||
>?
|
||||
This is very important.</P
|
||||
@ -150,8 +149,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3890"
|
||||
>27.3. Debug levels</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4516"
|
||||
>31.3. Debug levels</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the bug has anything to do with Samba behaving incorrectly as a
|
||||
@ -181,9 +180,15 @@ include = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m</PRE
|
||||
>then create a file
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.machine</TT
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>machine</VAR
|
||||
></TT
|
||||
> where
|
||||
"machine" is the name of the client you wish to debug. In that file
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>machine</VAR
|
||||
> is the name of the client you wish to debug. In that file
|
||||
put any smb.conf commands you want, for example
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -204,7 +209,10 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>debuglevel =</B
|
||||
> that has been
|
||||
used in older versions of Samba and is being retained for backwards
|
||||
compatibility of smb.conf files.</P
|
||||
compatibility of <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> files.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>As the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -220,14 +228,14 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3907"
|
||||
>27.4. Internal errors</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4536"
|
||||
>31.4. Internal errors</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you get a "INTERNAL ERROR" message in your log files it means that
|
||||
Samba got an unexpected signal while running. It is probably a
|
||||
segmentation fault and almost certainly means a bug in Samba (unless
|
||||
you have faulty hardware or system software)</P
|
||||
you have faulty hardware or system software).</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the message came from smbd then it will probably be accompanied by
|
||||
a message which details the last SMB message received by smbd. This
|
||||
@ -237,7 +245,10 @@ include it in your bug report.</P
|
||||
>You should also detail how to reproduce the problem, if
|
||||
possible. Please make this reasonably detailed.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You may also find that a core file appeared in a "corefiles"
|
||||
>You may also find that a core file appeared in a <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>corefiles</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
subdirectory of the directory where you keep your samba log
|
||||
files. This file is the most useful tool for tracking down the bug. To
|
||||
use it you do this:</P
|
||||
@ -248,11 +259,20 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>adding appropriate paths to smbd and core so gdb can find them. If you
|
||||
don't have gdb then try "dbx". Then within the debugger use the
|
||||
command "where" to give a stack trace of where the problem
|
||||
don't have gdb then try <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>dbx</KBD
|
||||
>. Then within the debugger use the
|
||||
command <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>where</KBD
|
||||
> to give a stack trace of where the problem
|
||||
occurred. Include this in your mail.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you known any assembly language then do a "disass" of the routine
|
||||
>If you known any assembly language then do a <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>disass</KBD
|
||||
> of the routine
|
||||
where the problem occurred (if its in a library routine then
|
||||
disassemble the routine that called it) and try to work out exactly
|
||||
where the problem is by looking at the surrounding code. Even if you
|
||||
@ -264,15 +284,30 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3917"
|
||||
>27.5. Attaching to a running process</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4550"
|
||||
>31.5. Attaching to a running process</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Unfortunately some unixes (in particular some recent linux kernels)
|
||||
refuse to dump a core file if the task has changed uid (which smbd
|
||||
does often). To debug with this sort of system you could try to attach
|
||||
to the running process using "gdb smbd PID" where you get PID from
|
||||
smbstatus. Then use "c" to continue and try to cause the core dump
|
||||
to the running process using <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>gdb smbd <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>PID</VAR
|
||||
></KBD
|
||||
> where you get <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>PID</VAR
|
||||
> from
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>smbstatus</SPAN
|
||||
>. Then use <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>c</KBD
|
||||
> to continue and try to cause the core dump
|
||||
using the client. The debugger should catch the fault and tell you
|
||||
where it occurred.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -281,18 +316,18 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3920"
|
||||
>27.6. Patches</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4558"
|
||||
>31.6. Patches</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The best sort of bug report is one that includes a fix! If you send us
|
||||
patches please use <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>diff -u</B
|
||||
patches please use <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>diff -u</KBD
|
||||
> format if your version of
|
||||
diff supports it, otherwise use <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>diff -c4</B
|
||||
diff supports it, otherwise use <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>diff -c4</KBD
|
||||
>. Make sure
|
||||
your do the diff against a clean version of the source and let me know
|
||||
exactly what version you used. </P
|
||||
|
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="COMPILING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 26. How to compile SAMBA</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 30. How to compile SAMBA</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can obtain the samba source from the <A
|
||||
HREF="http://samba.org/"
|
||||
@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3706"
|
||||
>26.1. Access Samba source code via CVS</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4323"
|
||||
>30.1. Access Samba source code via CVS</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3708"
|
||||
>26.1.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4325"
|
||||
>30.1.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS
|
||||
@ -117,8 +117,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3713"
|
||||
>26.1.2. CVS Access to samba.org</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4330"
|
||||
>30.1.2. CVS Access to samba.org</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS
|
||||
@ -130,8 +130,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3716"
|
||||
>26.1.2.1. Access via CVSweb</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4333"
|
||||
>30.1.2.1. Access via CVSweb</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can access the source code via your
|
||||
@ -151,8 +151,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3721"
|
||||
>26.1.2.2. Access via cvs</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4338"
|
||||
>30.1.2.2. Access via cvs</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can also access the source code via a
|
||||
@ -192,9 +192,9 @@ TYPE="1"
|
||||
> Run the command
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</B
|
||||
> <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -209,9 +209,9 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
> Run the command
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</B
|
||||
> <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -226,12 +226,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>
|
||||
and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names can be found on the
|
||||
"Development" page of the samba web site. A common request is to obtain the
|
||||
latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following command.
|
||||
latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following userinput.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</B
|
||||
> <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
@ -241,9 +241,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
the following command from within the samba directory:
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>cvs update -d -P</B
|
||||
> <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>cvs update -d -P</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3749"
|
||||
>26.2. Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4366"
|
||||
>30.2. Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> pserver.samba.org also exports unpacked copies of most parts of the CVS tree at <A
|
||||
@ -284,14 +284,14 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3755"
|
||||
>26.3. Building the Binaries</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4372"
|
||||
>30.3. Building the Binaries</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To do this, first run the program <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>To do this, first run the program <KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>./configure
|
||||
</B
|
||||
</KBD
|
||||
> in the source directory. This should automatically
|
||||
configure Samba for your operating system. If you have unusual
|
||||
needs then you may wish to run</P
|
||||
@ -370,8 +370,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3783"
|
||||
>26.3.1. Compiling samba with Active Directory support</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4400"
|
||||
>30.3.1. Compiling samba with Active Directory support</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In order to compile samba with ADS support, you need to have installed
|
||||
@ -420,8 +420,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3795"
|
||||
>26.3.1.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4412"
|
||||
>30.3.1.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On Debian you need to install the following packages:</P
|
||||
@ -451,8 +451,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3802"
|
||||
>26.3.1.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4419"
|
||||
>30.3.1.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On RedHat this means you should have at least: </P
|
||||
@ -493,22 +493,22 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3812"
|
||||
>26.4. Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4429"
|
||||
>30.4. Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either
|
||||
as daemons or from <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>inetd</B
|
||||
>. Don't try
|
||||
as daemons or from <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>inetd</SPAN
|
||||
>Don't try
|
||||
to do both! Either you can put them in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> inetd.conf</TT
|
||||
> and have them started on demand
|
||||
by <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>inetd</B
|
||||
by <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>inetd</SPAN
|
||||
>, or you can start them as
|
||||
daemons either from the command line or in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
@ -518,13 +518,13 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
the bit about what user you need to be in order to start
|
||||
Samba. In many cases you must be root.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The main advantage of starting <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>The main advantage of starting <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>smbd</SPAN
|
||||
>
|
||||
and <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
and <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>nmbd</SPAN
|
||||
> using the recommended daemon method
|
||||
is that they will respond slightly more quickly to an initial connection
|
||||
request.</P
|
||||
@ -533,8 +533,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3822"
|
||||
>26.4.1. Starting from inetd.conf</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4439"
|
||||
>30.4.1. Starting from inetd.conf</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE; The following will be different if
|
||||
@ -595,19 +595,39 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the
|
||||
"interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address
|
||||
and netmask of your interfaces. Run <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>ifconfig</B
|
||||
and netmask of your interfaces. Run <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>ifconfig</SPAN
|
||||
>
|
||||
as root if you don't know what the broadcast is for your
|
||||
net. <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
net. <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
>nmbd</SPAN
|
||||
> tries to determine it at run
|
||||
time, but fails on some unixes. See the section on "testing nmbd"
|
||||
for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P
|
||||
time, but fails on some unixes.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/warning.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Warning"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Many unixes only accept around 5
|
||||
parameters on the command line in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>inetd.conf</TT
|
||||
@ -618,14 +638,18 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>inetd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Restart <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>inetd</B
|
||||
>, perhaps just send
|
||||
it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> nmbd</B
|
||||
it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="APPLICATION"
|
||||
> nmbd</SPAN
|
||||
> then you may need to kill nmbd as well.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -633,8 +657,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3851"
|
||||
>26.4.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4469"
|
||||
>30.4.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To start the server as a daemon you should create
|
||||
@ -676,13 +700,37 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE: If you use the SVR4 style init system then
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you use the SVR4 style init system then
|
||||
you may like to look at the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>examples/svr4-startup</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
script to make Samba fit into that system.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -67,14 +67,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="DIAGNOSIS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 28. The samba checklist</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 32. The samba checklist</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3943"
|
||||
>28.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4581"
|
||||
>32.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your
|
||||
@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3948"
|
||||
>28.2. Assumptions</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4586"
|
||||
>32.2. Assumptions</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In all of the tests it is assumed you have a Samba server called
|
||||
@ -133,17 +133,18 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3958"
|
||||
>28.3. Tests</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4596"
|
||||
>32.3. The tests</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3960"
|
||||
>28.3.1. Test 1</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
CLASS="PROCEDURE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
>Diagnosing your samba server</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><OL
|
||||
TYPE="1"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command
|
||||
"testparm smb.conf". If it reports any errors then your smb.conf
|
||||
@ -157,15 +158,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/usr/local/samba/lib</TT
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3966"
|
||||
>28.3.2. Test 2</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command "ping BIGSERVER" from the PC and "ping ACLIENT" from
|
||||
the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP
|
||||
@ -183,15 +177,8 @@ you do have correct entries for the remainder of these tests. </P
|
||||
software. You will need to relax the rules to let in the workstation
|
||||
in question, perhaps by allowing access from another subnet (on Linux
|
||||
this is done via the ipfwadm program.)</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3972"
|
||||
>28.3.3. Test 3</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command "smbclient -L BIGSERVER" on the unix box. You
|
||||
should get a list of available shares back. </P
|
||||
@ -254,15 +241,8 @@ to start smbd as a daemon, it can avoid a lot of frustration!</P
|
||||
and / or broadcast address settings are incorrect. Please check that the
|
||||
network interface IP Address / Broadcast Address / Subnet Mask settings are
|
||||
correct and that Samba has correctly noted these in the log.nmb file.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3987"
|
||||
>28.3.4. Test 4</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command "nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__". You should get the
|
||||
IP address of your Samba server back.</P
|
||||
@ -275,15 +255,8 @@ to udp port 137.</P
|
||||
parameters on the command line. If this is the case then create a
|
||||
one-line script that contains the right parameters and run that from
|
||||
inetd.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3992"
|
||||
>28.3.5. Test 5</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -296,15 +269,8 @@ got the name of the PC wrong. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If ACLIENT doesn't resolve via DNS then use the IP address of the
|
||||
client in the above test.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3998"
|
||||
>28.3.6. Test 6</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -330,15 +296,8 @@ subnet.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This test will probably fail if your subnet mask and broadcast address are
|
||||
not correct. (Refer to TEST 3 notes above).</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4006"
|
||||
>28.3.7. Test 7</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -419,15 +378,8 @@ when you type <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>dir</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4032"
|
||||
>28.3.8. Test 8</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On the PC type the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -479,15 +431,8 @@ name and password.</P
|
||||
it probably means that the host is not contactable via tcp services.
|
||||
Check to see if the host is running tcp wrappers, and if so add an entry in
|
||||
the hosts.allow file for your client (or subnet, etc.)</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4049"
|
||||
>28.3.9. Test 9</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -513,15 +458,8 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>.
|
||||
Turn it back on to fix.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4057"
|
||||
>28.3.10. Test 10</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Run the command <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -539,15 +477,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preferred master = yes</B
|
||||
> to ensure that
|
||||
an election is held at startup.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4063"
|
||||
>28.3.11. Test 11</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should
|
||||
appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you
|
||||
@ -566,6 +497,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> in your
|
||||
smb.conf file, or enable encrypted passwords AFTER compiling in support
|
||||
for encrypted passwords (refer to the Makefile).</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -573,8 +506,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4068"
|
||||
>28.4. Still having troubles?</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4697"
|
||||
>32.4. Still having troubles?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Try the mailing list or newsgroup, or use the ethereal utility to
|
||||
@ -589,7 +522,7 @@ out the samba web page at
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="http://samba.org/samba"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>http://samba.org/samba</A
|
||||
>http://samba.org/samba/</A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Also look at the other docs in the Samba package!</P
|
||||
|
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1315"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1413"
|
||||
>9.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 3.0</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1369"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1467"
|
||||
>9.2. Why is this better than security = server?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TITLE
|
||||
>Configuring Group Mapping</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
|
||||
@ -16,9 +16,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists"
|
||||
HREF="unix-permissions.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Printing Support"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -60,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -75,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="GROUPMAPPING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 12. Group mapping HOWTO</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 11. Configuring Group Mapping</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>
|
||||
Starting with Samba 3.0 alpha 2, a new group mapping function is available. The
|
||||
@ -143,9 +142,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>domain admins</B
|
||||
> group by running the command:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -c "Domain Admins" -u domadm</B
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -c "Domain Admins" -u domadm</KBD
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></OL
|
||||
@ -165,9 +164,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can list the various groups in the mapping database like this</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -v</B
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>smbgroupedit -v</KBD
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -204,7 +203,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -228,8 +227,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</TD
|
||||
>Printing Support</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Securing Samba"
|
||||
HREF="securing-samba.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="securing-samba.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,18 +74,21 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="IMPROVED-BROWSING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 18. Improved browsing in samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 22. Improved browsing in samba</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3047"
|
||||
>18.1. Overview of browsing</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3695"
|
||||
>22.1. Overview of browsing</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list
|
||||
of machines in a network, a so-called "browse list". This list
|
||||
of machines in a network, a so-called <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>browse list</B
|
||||
>. This list
|
||||
contains machines that are ready to offer file and/or print services
|
||||
to other machines within the network. Thus it does not include
|
||||
machines which aren't currently able to do server tasks. The browse
|
||||
@ -93,7 +96,7 @@ list is heavily used by all SMB clients. Configuration of SMB
|
||||
browsing has been problematic for some Samba users, hence this
|
||||
document.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>MS Windows 2000 and later, as with Samba-3 and later, can be
|
||||
>MS Windows 2000 and later, as with Samba 3 and later, can be
|
||||
configured to not use NetBIOS over TCP/IP. When configured this way
|
||||
it is imperative that name resolution (using DNS/LDAP/ADS) be correctly
|
||||
configured and operative. Browsing will NOT work if name resolution
|
||||
@ -109,8 +112,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3052"
|
||||
>18.2. Browsing support in samba</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3701"
|
||||
>22.2. Browsing support in samba</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba facilitates browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd
|
||||
@ -129,45 +132,91 @@ workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain: on each wide area
|
||||
network, you must only ever have one domain master browser per workgroup,
|
||||
regardless of whether it is NT, Samba or any other type of domain master
|
||||
that is providing this service.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>[Note that nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not
|
||||
necessary to specifically use samba as your WINS server. MS Windows
|
||||
NT4, Server or Advanced Server 2000 or 2003 can be configured as
|
||||
your WINS server. In a mixed NT/2000/2003 server and samba environment on
|
||||
a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that you use the Microsoft
|
||||
WINS server capabilities. In a samba-only environment, it is
|
||||
recommended that you use one and only one Samba server as your WINS server.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To get browsing to work you need to run nmbd as usual, but will need
|
||||
to use the "workgroup" option in smb.conf to control what workgroup
|
||||
Samba becomes a part of.</P
|
||||
to use the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>workgroup</B
|
||||
> option in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
to control what workgroup Samba becomes a part of.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba also has a useful option for a Samba server to offer itself for
|
||||
browsing on another subnet. It is recommended that this option is only
|
||||
used for 'unusual' purposes: announcements over the internet, for
|
||||
example. See "remote announce" in the smb.conf man page. </P
|
||||
example. See <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>remote announce</B
|
||||
> in the
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> man page. </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3060"
|
||||
>18.3. Problem resolution</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3714"
|
||||
>22.3. Problem resolution</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help
|
||||
you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding
|
||||
problems. Also note that the current browse list usually gets stored
|
||||
in text form in a file called browse.dat.</P
|
||||
in text form in a file called <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>browse.dat</TT
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that if it doesn't work for you, then you should still be able to
|
||||
type the server name as \\SERVER in filemanager then hit enter and
|
||||
filemanager should display the list of available shares.</P
|
||||
type the server name as <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>\\SERVER</TT
|
||||
> in filemanager then
|
||||
hit enter and filemanager should display the list of available shares.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Some people find browsing fails because they don't have the global
|
||||
"guest account" set to a valid account. Remember that the IPC$
|
||||
connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>guest account</B
|
||||
> set to a valid account. Remember that the
|
||||
IPC$ connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must
|
||||
have a valid guest account.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
@ -183,13 +232,6 @@ server resources.</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Also, a lot of people are getting bitten by the problem of too many
|
||||
parameters on the command line of nmbd in inetd.conf. This trick is to
|
||||
not use spaces between the option and the parameter (eg: -d2 instead
|
||||
of -d 2), and to not use the -B and -N options. New versions of nmbd
|
||||
are now far more likely to correctly find your broadcast and network
|
||||
address, so in most cases these aren't needed.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The other big problem people have is that their broadcast address,
|
||||
netmask or IP address is wrong (specified with the "interfaces" option
|
||||
in smb.conf)</P
|
||||
@ -199,8 +241,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3069"
|
||||
>18.4. Browsing across subnets</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3725"
|
||||
>22.4. Browsing across subnets</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Since the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1) Samba has been
|
||||
@ -230,8 +272,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3074"
|
||||
>18.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3730"
|
||||
>22.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple
|
||||
@ -441,8 +483,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3109"
|
||||
>18.5. Setting up a WINS server</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3765"
|
||||
>22.5. Setting up a WINS server</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up
|
||||
@ -460,17 +502,17 @@ yes. If you have any older versions of Samba on your network it is
|
||||
strongly suggested you upgrade to a recent version, or at the very
|
||||
least set the parameter to 'no' on all these machines.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Machines with "<B
|
||||
>Machines with <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins support = yes</B
|
||||
>" will keep a list of
|
||||
> will keep a list of
|
||||
all NetBIOS names registered with them, acting as a DNS for NetBIOS names.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You should set up only ONE wins server. Do NOT set the
|
||||
"<B
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins support = yes</B
|
||||
>" option on more than one Samba
|
||||
> option on more than one Samba
|
||||
server.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To set up a Windows NT Server as a WINS server you need to set up
|
||||
@ -481,8 +523,11 @@ refuse to document these replication protocols Samba cannot currently
|
||||
participate in these replications. It is possible in the future that
|
||||
a Samba->Samba WINS replication protocol may be defined, in which
|
||||
case more than one Samba machine could be set up as a WINS server
|
||||
but currently only one Samba server should have the "wins support = yes"
|
||||
parameter set.</P
|
||||
but currently only one Samba server should have the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins support = yes</B
|
||||
> parameter set.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>After the WINS server has been configured you must ensure that all
|
||||
machines participating on the network are configured with the address
|
||||
@ -503,14 +548,14 @@ machine or its IP address.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that this line MUST NOT BE SET in the smb.conf file of the Samba
|
||||
server acting as the WINS server itself. If you set both the
|
||||
"<B
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins support = yes</B
|
||||
>" option and the
|
||||
"<B
|
||||
> option and the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins server = <name></B
|
||||
>" option then
|
||||
> option then
|
||||
nmbd will fail to start.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There are two possible scenarios for setting up cross subnet browsing.
|
||||
@ -524,8 +569,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3128"
|
||||
>18.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3785"
|
||||
>22.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines
|
||||
@ -586,15 +631,31 @@ os level = 65</PRE
|
||||
or they will war with each other over which is to be the local
|
||||
master browser.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "local master" parameter allows Samba to act as a local master
|
||||
browser. The "preferred master" causes nmbd to force a browser
|
||||
election on startup and the "os level" parameter sets Samba high
|
||||
enough so that it should win any browser elections.</P
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>local master</B
|
||||
> parameter allows Samba to act as a
|
||||
local master browser. The <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preferred master</B
|
||||
> causes nmbd
|
||||
to force a browser election on startup and the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>os level</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
parameter sets Samba high enough so that it should win any browser elections.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have an NT machine on the subnet that you wish to
|
||||
be the local master browser then you can disable Samba from
|
||||
becoming a local master browser by setting the following
|
||||
options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P
|
||||
options in the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>[global]</B
|
||||
> section of the
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> file :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
@ -609,8 +670,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3146"
|
||||
>18.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3808"
|
||||
>22.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then
|
||||
@ -618,13 +679,23 @@ you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser.
|
||||
By default, a Windows NT Primary Domain Controller for a Domain
|
||||
name is also the Domain master browser for that name, and many
|
||||
things will break if a Samba server registers the Domain master
|
||||
browser NetBIOS name (DOMAIN<1B>) with WINS instead of the PDC.</P
|
||||
browser NetBIOS name (<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>DOMAIN</VAR
|
||||
><1B>)
|
||||
with WINS instead of the PDC.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For subnets other than the one containing the Windows NT PDC
|
||||
you may set up Samba servers as local master browsers as
|
||||
described. To make a Samba server a local master browser set
|
||||
the following options in the [global] section of the smb.conf
|
||||
file :</P
|
||||
the following options in the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>[global]</B
|
||||
> section
|
||||
of the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> file :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
@ -635,17 +706,30 @@ os level = 65</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you wish to have a Samba server fight the election with machines
|
||||
on the same subnet you may set the "os level" parameter to lower
|
||||
levels. By doing this you can tune the order of machines that
|
||||
on the same subnet you may set the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>os level</B
|
||||
> parameter
|
||||
to lower levels. By doing this you can tune the order of machines that
|
||||
will become local master browsers if they are running. For
|
||||
more details on this see the section "FORCING SAMBA TO BE THE MASTER"
|
||||
more details on this see the section <A
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html#BROWSE-FORCE-MASTER"
|
||||
>Forcing samba to be the master browser</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
below.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have Windows NT machines that are members of the domain
|
||||
on all subnets, and you are sure they will always be running then
|
||||
you can disable Samba from taking part in browser elections and
|
||||
ever becoming a local master browser by setting following options
|
||||
in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P
|
||||
in the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>[global]</B
|
||||
> section of the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
file :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -660,37 +744,64 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3156"
|
||||
>18.8. Forcing samba to be the master</A
|
||||
NAME="BROWSE-FORCE-MASTER"
|
||||
>22.8. Forcing samba to be the master</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Who becomes the "master browser" is determined by an election process
|
||||
using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters
|
||||
>Who becomes the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>master browser</B
|
||||
> is determined by an election
|
||||
process using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters
|
||||
which determine what precedence (bias) a host should have in the
|
||||
election. By default Samba uses a very low precedence and thus loses
|
||||
elections to just about anyone else.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want Samba to win elections then just set the "os level" global
|
||||
option in smb.conf to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34
|
||||
>If you want Samba to win elections then just set the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>os level</B
|
||||
> global
|
||||
option in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34
|
||||
would make it win all elections over every other system (except other
|
||||
samba systems!)</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A "os level" of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not MS Windows
|
||||
>A <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>os level</B
|
||||
> of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not MS Windows
|
||||
NT/2K Server. A MS Windows NT/2K Server domain controller uses level 32.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The maximum os level is 255</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want samba to force an election on startup, then set the
|
||||
"preferred master" global option in smb.conf to "yes". Samba will
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preferred master</B
|
||||
> global option in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
> to "yes". Samba will
|
||||
then have a slight advantage over other potential master browsers
|
||||
that are not preferred master browsers. Use this parameter with
|
||||
care, as if you have two hosts (whether they are windows 95 or NT or
|
||||
samba) on the same local subnet both set with "preferred master" to
|
||||
samba) on the same local subnet both set with <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preferred master</B
|
||||
> to
|
||||
"yes", then periodically and continually they will force an election
|
||||
in order to become the local master browser.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want samba to be a "domain master browser", then it is
|
||||
recommended that you also set "preferred master" to "yes", because
|
||||
>If you want samba to be a <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>domain master browser</B
|
||||
>, then it is
|
||||
recommended that you also set <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preferred master</B
|
||||
> to "yes", because
|
||||
samba will not become a domain master browser for the whole of your
|
||||
LAN or WAN if it is not also a local master browser on its own
|
||||
broadcast isolated subnet.</P
|
||||
@ -708,14 +819,20 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3165"
|
||||
>18.9. Making samba the domain master</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3843"
|
||||
>22.9. Making samba the domain master</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of
|
||||
multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can
|
||||
make samba act as the domain master by setting "domain master = yes"
|
||||
in smb.conf. By default it will not be a domain master.</P
|
||||
make samba act as the domain master by setting <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>domain master = yes</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
in <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>. By default it will not be a domain master.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you should NOT set Samba to be the domain master for a
|
||||
workgroup that has the same name as an NT Domain.</P
|
||||
@ -726,8 +843,14 @@ master browsers on other subnets and then contact them to synchronise
|
||||
browse lists.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you want samba to be the domain master then I suggest you also set
|
||||
the "os level" high enough to make sure it wins elections, and set
|
||||
"preferred master" to "yes", to get samba to force an election on
|
||||
the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>os level</B
|
||||
> high enough to make sure it wins elections, and set
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preferred master</B
|
||||
> to "yes", to get samba to force an election on
|
||||
startup.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that all your servers (including samba) and clients should be
|
||||
@ -781,8 +904,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3183"
|
||||
>18.10. Note about broadcast addresses</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3865"
|
||||
>22.10. Note about broadcast addresses</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it
|
||||
@ -795,13 +918,19 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3186"
|
||||
>18.11. Multiple interfaces</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3868"
|
||||
>22.11. Multiple interfaces</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you
|
||||
have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the "interfaces"
|
||||
option in smb.conf to configure them. See smb.conf(5) for details.</P
|
||||
have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>interfaces</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
option in smb.conf to configure them. See <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
> for details.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -838,7 +967,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="securing-samba.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -862,7 +991,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD
|
||||
>Securing Samba</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN26"
|
||||
NAME="AEN65"
|
||||
>1.1. Obtaining and installing samba</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN31"
|
||||
NAME="AEN70"
|
||||
>1.2. Configuring samba</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN36"
|
||||
NAME="AEN75"
|
||||
>1.2.1. Editing the smb.conf file</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN50"
|
||||
NAME="AEN89"
|
||||
>1.2.1.1. Test your config file with
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN58"
|
||||
NAME="AEN97"
|
||||
>1.2.2. SWAT</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN64"
|
||||
NAME="AEN103"
|
||||
>1.3. Try listing the shares available on your
|
||||
server</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN73"
|
||||
NAME="AEN112"
|
||||
>1.4. Try connecting with the unix client</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN89"
|
||||
NAME="AEN128"
|
||||
>1.5. Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
|
||||
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
@ -369,7 +369,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN103"
|
||||
NAME="AEN142"
|
||||
>1.6. What If Things Don't Work?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN108"
|
||||
NAME="AEN147"
|
||||
>1.6.1. Scope IDs</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN111"
|
||||
NAME="AEN150"
|
||||
>1.6.2. Locking</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind"
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="INTEGRATE-MS-NETWORKS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 17. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 21. Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This section deals with NetBIOS over TCP/IP name to IP address resolution. If you
|
||||
your MS Windows clients are NOT configured to use NetBIOS over TCP/IP then this
|
||||
@ -155,8 +155,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2932"
|
||||
>17.1. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3580"
|
||||
>21.1. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The key configuration files covered in this section are:</P
|
||||
@ -197,8 +197,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2948"
|
||||
>17.1.1. <TT
|
||||
NAME="AEN3596"
|
||||
>21.1.1. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/hosts</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
@ -278,8 +278,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2964"
|
||||
>17.1.2. <TT
|
||||
NAME="AEN3612"
|
||||
>21.1.2. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/resolv.conf</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
@ -316,8 +316,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2975"
|
||||
>17.1.3. <TT
|
||||
NAME="AEN3623"
|
||||
>21.1.3. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/host.conf</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
@ -345,8 +345,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2983"
|
||||
>17.1.4. <TT
|
||||
NAME="AEN3631"
|
||||
>21.1.4. <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
@ -414,8 +414,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2995"
|
||||
>17.2. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3643"
|
||||
>21.2. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine
|
||||
@ -499,8 +499,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3007"
|
||||
>17.2.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3655"
|
||||
>21.2.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is
|
||||
@ -526,8 +526,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3012"
|
||||
>17.2.2. The LMHOSTS file</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3660"
|
||||
>21.2.2. The LMHOSTS file</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or
|
||||
@ -629,8 +629,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3020"
|
||||
>17.2.3. HOSTS file</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3668"
|
||||
>21.2.3. HOSTS file</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in
|
||||
@ -651,8 +651,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3025"
|
||||
>17.2.4. DNS Lookup</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3673"
|
||||
>21.2.4. DNS Lookup</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network
|
||||
@ -671,8 +671,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3028"
|
||||
>17.2.5. WINS Lookup</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3676"
|
||||
>21.2.5. WINS Lookup</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivaent of the
|
||||
@ -724,7 +724,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="winbind.html"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD
|
||||
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ CLASS="TITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN21"
|
||||
NAME="AEN42"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
>Introduction</H1
|
||||
@ -103,60 +103,60 @@ HREF="install.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN26"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN65"
|
||||
>Obtaining and installing samba</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN31"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN70"
|
||||
>Configuring samba</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN36"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN75"
|
||||
>Editing the smb.conf file</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN58"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN97"
|
||||
>SWAT</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN64"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN103"
|
||||
>Try listing the shares available on your
|
||||
server</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN73"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN112"
|
||||
>Try connecting with the unix client</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN89"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN128"
|
||||
>Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
|
||||
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN103"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN142"
|
||||
>What If Things Don't Work?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.6.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN108"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN147"
|
||||
>Scope IDs</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>1.6.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN111"
|
||||
HREF="install.html#AEN150"
|
||||
>Locking</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -172,38 +172,44 @@ HREF="browsing-quick.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN130"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN174"
|
||||
>Discussion</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN139"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN193"
|
||||
>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
|
||||
dependable browsing using Samba</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN149"
|
||||
>Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN207"
|
||||
>Use of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Remote Announce</B
|
||||
> parameter</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN163"
|
||||
>Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN230"
|
||||
>Use of the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>Remote Browse Sync</B
|
||||
> parameter</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN168"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN241"
|
||||
>Use of WINS</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN179"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN255"
|
||||
>Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>2.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN187"
|
||||
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN263"
|
||||
>Name Resolution Order</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -217,150 +223,131 @@ HREF="passdb.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN244"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN321"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN251"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN328"
|
||||
>Important Notes About Security</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.2.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN277"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN354"
|
||||
>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.2.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN283"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN360"
|
||||
>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN289"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN366"
|
||||
>The smbpasswd Command</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN320"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN397"
|
||||
>Plain text</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN325"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN402"
|
||||
>TDB</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN328"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN405"
|
||||
>LDAP</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN330"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN407"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN350"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN427"
|
||||
>Introduction</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN379"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN456"
|
||||
>Supported LDAP Servers</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN384"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN461"
|
||||
>Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN396"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN473"
|
||||
>Configuring Samba with LDAP</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN443"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN520"
|
||||
>Accounts and Groups management</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN448"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN525"
|
||||
>Security and sambaAccount</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.8. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN468"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN545"
|
||||
>LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.6.9. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN538"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN615"
|
||||
>Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN546"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN623"
|
||||
>MySQL</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.7.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN548"
|
||||
>Building</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.7.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN554"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN625"
|
||||
>Creating the database</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.7.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN564"
|
||||
>3.7.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN635"
|
||||
>Configuring</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.7.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN581"
|
||||
>3.7.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN652"
|
||||
>Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.7.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN586"
|
||||
>3.7.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN657"
|
||||
>Getting non-column data from the table</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.8. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN594"
|
||||
>Passdb XML plugin</A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN665"
|
||||
>XML</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.8.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN596"
|
||||
>Building</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>3.8.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html#AEN602"
|
||||
>Usage</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
|
@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"></HEAD
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="MSDFS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 19. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 20. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3200"
|
||||
>19.1. Instructions</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3518"
|
||||
>20.1. Instructions</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of
|
||||
@ -212,8 +212,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3235"
|
||||
>19.1.1. Notes</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3553"
|
||||
>20.1.1. Notes</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Improved browsing in samba</TD
|
||||
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
@ -299,7 +299,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
|
||||
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -196,14 +196,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
than a file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-a</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If this parameter is specified, each new
|
||||
connection will append log messages to the log file.
|
||||
This is the default.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -222,26 +214,10 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
given. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-o</DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If this parameter is specified, the
|
||||
log files will be overwritten when opened. By default,
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
> will append entries to the log
|
||||
files.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the help information (usage)
|
||||
for <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-H <filename></DT
|
||||
@ -312,113 +288,80 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d <debug level></DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>debuglevel is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will
|
||||
be logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts
|
||||
of log data, and should only be used when investigating
|
||||
a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers
|
||||
and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely
|
||||
cryptic.</P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will override
|
||||
the <A
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>log level</VAR
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>
|
||||
parameter in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l <log directory></DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The -l parameter specifies a directory
|
||||
into which the "log.nmbd" log file will be created
|
||||
for operational data from the running <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
server. The default log directory is compiled into Samba
|
||||
as part of the build process. Common defaults are <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> /usr/local/samba/var/log.nmb</TT
|
||||
>, <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> /usr/samba/var/log.nmb</TT
|
||||
> or
|
||||
<TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/var/log/log.nmb</TT
|
||||
>. <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>Beware:</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>
|
||||
If the directory specified does not exist, <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
will log to the default debug log location defined at compile time.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-n <primary NetBIOS name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option allows you to override
|
||||
the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical
|
||||
to setting the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>NetBIOS
|
||||
name</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file. However, a command
|
||||
line setting will take precedence over settings in
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-p <UDP port number></DT
|
||||
@ -433,34 +376,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you
|
||||
won't need help!</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default configuration file name
|
||||
is set at build time, typically as <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</TT
|
||||
>, but
|
||||
this may be changed when Samba is autoconfigured.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the configuration details
|
||||
required by the server. See <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN162"
|
||||
NAME="AEN131"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>FILES</H2
|
||||
@ -629,7 +551,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN216"
|
||||
NAME="AEN185"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SIGNALS</H2
|
||||
@ -693,7 +615,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN233"
|
||||
NAME="AEN202"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -704,7 +626,7 @@ NAME="AEN233"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN236"
|
||||
NAME="AEN205"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -764,7 +686,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN260"
|
||||
NAME="AEN229"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -148,10 +148,86 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
an IP Address and do a node status query on this address.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h</DT
|
||||
>-n <primary NetBIOS name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a help (usage) message.</P
|
||||
>This option allows you to override
|
||||
the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical
|
||||
to setting the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>NetBIOS
|
||||
name</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file. However, a command
|
||||
line setting will take precedence over settings in
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i <scope></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmblookup</B
|
||||
> will use to communicate with when
|
||||
generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS
|
||||
scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>very</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> rarely used, only set this parameter
|
||||
if you are the system administrator in charge of all the
|
||||
NetBIOS systems you communicate with.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-W|--workgroup=domain</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Set the SMB domain of the username. This
|
||||
overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in
|
||||
smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the servers
|
||||
NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local
|
||||
SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM). </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-O socket options</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>TCP socket options to set on the client
|
||||
socket. See the socket options parameter in
|
||||
the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> manual page for the list of valid
|
||||
options. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-B <broadcast address></DT
|
||||
@ -193,71 +269,84 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
query a WINS server.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d <debuglevel></DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default value if this parameter is not specified
|
||||
is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged
|
||||
about the activities of <B
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmblookup</B
|
||||
>. At level
|
||||
0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged.</P
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of
|
||||
log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem.
|
||||
Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and
|
||||
generate HUGE amounts of data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will override
|
||||
the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL"
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> log level</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter in the <TT
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <smb.conf></DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This parameter specifies the pathname to
|
||||
the Samba configuration file, <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
> smb.conf(5)</A
|
||||
>. This file controls all aspects of
|
||||
the Samba setup on the machine.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i <scope></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmblookup</B
|
||||
> will use to communicate with when
|
||||
generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS
|
||||
scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>very</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> rarely used, only set this parameter
|
||||
if you are the system administrator in charge of all the
|
||||
NetBIOS systems you communicate with.</P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-T</DT
|
||||
@ -303,7 +392,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN121"
|
||||
NAME="AEN154"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXAMPLES</H2
|
||||
@ -340,7 +429,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN133"
|
||||
NAME="AEN166"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -351,7 +440,7 @@ NAME="AEN133"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN136"
|
||||
NAME="AEN169"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -379,7 +468,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN148"
|
||||
NAME="AEN181"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="OTHER-CLIENTS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 25. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 29. Samba and other CIFS clients</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This chapter contains client-specific information.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -82,8 +82,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3590"
|
||||
>25.1. Macintosh clients?</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4196"
|
||||
>29.1. Macintosh clients?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Yes. <A
|
||||
@ -128,16 +128,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3599"
|
||||
>25.2. OS2 Client</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4205"
|
||||
>29.2. OS2 Client</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3601"
|
||||
>25.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
|
||||
NAME="AEN4207"
|
||||
>29.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
|
||||
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -195,8 +195,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3616"
|
||||
>25.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
|
||||
NAME="AEN4222"
|
||||
>29.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
|
||||
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -239,8 +239,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3625"
|
||||
>25.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
|
||||
NAME="AEN4231"
|
||||
>29.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
|
||||
is used as a client?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -261,8 +261,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3629"
|
||||
>25.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working
|
||||
NAME="AEN4235"
|
||||
>29.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working
|
||||
for OS/2 clients?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -308,16 +308,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3639"
|
||||
>25.3. Windows for Workgroups</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4245"
|
||||
>29.3. Windows for Workgroups</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3641"
|
||||
>25.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4247"
|
||||
>29.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Use the latest TCP/IP stack from microsoft if you use Windows
|
||||
@ -338,8 +338,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3646"
|
||||
>25.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4252"
|
||||
>29.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>WfWg does a lousy job with passwords. I find that if I change my
|
||||
@ -358,8 +358,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3651"
|
||||
>25.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4257"
|
||||
>29.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There is a program call admincfg.exe
|
||||
@ -377,8 +377,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3655"
|
||||
>25.3.4. Case handling of passwords</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4261"
|
||||
>29.3.4. Case handling of passwords</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows for Workgroups uppercases the password before sending it to the server. Unix passwords can be case-sensitive though. Check the <A
|
||||
@ -395,8 +395,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3660"
|
||||
>25.3.5. Use TCP/IP as default protocol</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4266"
|
||||
>29.3.5. Use TCP/IP as default protocol</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To support print queue reporting you may find
|
||||
@ -411,8 +411,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3663"
|
||||
>25.4. Windows '95/'98</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4269"
|
||||
>29.4. Windows '95/'98</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When using Windows 95 OEM SR2 the following updates are recommended where Samba
|
||||
@ -459,8 +459,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3679"
|
||||
>25.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4285"
|
||||
>29.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>
|
||||
@ -526,15 +526,49 @@ for the profile. This default ACL includes </P
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>DOMAIN\user "Full Control"</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOTE : This bug does not occur when using winbind to
|
||||
create accounts on the Samba host for Domain users.</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This bug does not occur when using winbind to
|
||||
create accounts on the Samba host for Domain users.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4302"
|
||||
>29.6. Windows NT 3.1</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have problems communicating across routers with Windows
|
||||
NT 3.1 workstations, read <A
|
||||
HREF="http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;[LN];Q103765"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>this Microsoft Knowledge Base article</A
|
||||
>. </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
|
@ -2,8 +2,7 @@
|
||||
<HTML
|
||||
><HEAD
|
||||
><TITLE
|
||||
>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</TITLE
|
||||
>PAM Configuration for Centrally Managed Authentication</TITLE
|
||||
><META
|
||||
NAME="GENERATOR"
|
||||
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
|
||||
@ -14,11 +13,11 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Desktop Profile Management"
|
||||
HREF="profilemgmt.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Printing Support"
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -46,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
HREF="profilemgmt.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -60,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -75,15 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PAM"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 13. Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 18. PAM Configuration for Centrally Managed Authentication</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1866"
|
||||
>13.1. Samba and PAM</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3332"
|
||||
>18.1. Samba and PAM</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the
|
||||
@ -150,7 +148,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> eg: "auth required /other_path/pam_strange_module.so"
|
||||
> auth required /other_path/pam_strange_module.so
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
@ -192,10 +190,16 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>PAM allows use of replacable modules. Those available on a
|
||||
sample system include:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
><SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$</SAMP
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>/bin/ls /lib/security</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> $ /bin/ls /lib/security
|
||||
pam_access.so pam_ftp.so pam_limits.so
|
||||
> pam_access.so pam_ftp.so pam_limits.so
|
||||
pam_ncp_auth.so pam_rhosts_auth.so pam_stress.so
|
||||
pam_cracklib.so pam_group.so pam_listfile.so
|
||||
pam_nologin.so pam_rootok.so pam_tally.so
|
||||
@ -289,10 +293,10 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> #%PAM-1.0
|
||||
# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service
|
||||
#
|
||||
auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nullok nodelay shadow audit
|
||||
account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay
|
||||
session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay
|
||||
password required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE
|
||||
auth required pam_pwdb.so nullok nodelay shadow audit
|
||||
account required pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay
|
||||
session required pam_pwdb.so nodelay
|
||||
password required pam_pwdb.so shadow md5</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In the following example the decision has been made to use the
|
||||
@ -306,10 +310,10 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
> #%PAM-1.0
|
||||
# The PAM configuration file for the `samba' service
|
||||
#
|
||||
auth required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay
|
||||
account required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay
|
||||
session required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so nodelay
|
||||
password required /lib/security/pam_smbpass.so nodelay smbconf=/etc/samba.d/smb.conf</PRE
|
||||
auth required pam_smbpass.so nodelay
|
||||
account required pam_pwdb.so audit nodelay
|
||||
session required pam_pwdb.so nodelay
|
||||
password required pam_smbpass.so nodelay smbconf=/etc/samba.d/smb.conf</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
@ -359,8 +363,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1915"
|
||||
>13.2. Distributed Authentication</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3383"
|
||||
>18.2. Distributed Authentication</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The astute administrator will realize from this that the
|
||||
@ -385,8 +389,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1920"
|
||||
>13.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3388"
|
||||
>18.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There is an option in smb.conf called <A
|
||||
@ -437,7 +441,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
HREF="profilemgmt.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -455,7 +459,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="printing.html"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -465,7 +469,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
|
||||
>Desktop Profile Management</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
@ -479,7 +483,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Printing Support</TD
|
||||
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN244"
|
||||
NAME="AEN321"
|
||||
>3.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN251"
|
||||
NAME="AEN328"
|
||||
>3.2. Important Notes About Security</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN277"
|
||||
NAME="AEN354"
|
||||
>3.2.1. Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -310,7 +310,7 @@ BORDER="0"
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
>Encrypted password support allows auto-matic share
|
||||
>Encrypted password support allows automatic share
|
||||
(resource) reconnects.</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TBODY
|
||||
@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN283"
|
||||
NAME="AEN360"
|
||||
>3.2.2. Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN289"
|
||||
NAME="AEN366"
|
||||
>3.3. The smbpasswd Command</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN320"
|
||||
NAME="AEN397"
|
||||
>3.4. Plain text</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN325"
|
||||
NAME="AEN402"
|
||||
>3.5. TDB</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -494,7 +494,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN328"
|
||||
NAME="AEN405"
|
||||
>3.6. LDAP</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -502,7 +502,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN330"
|
||||
NAME="AEN407"
|
||||
>3.6.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -570,7 +570,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN350"
|
||||
NAME="AEN427"
|
||||
>3.6.2. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN379"
|
||||
NAME="AEN456"
|
||||
>3.6.3. Supported LDAP Servers</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -690,12 +690,12 @@ and client SDK. However, due to lack of testing so far, there are bound
|
||||
to be compile errors and bugs. These should not be hard to fix.
|
||||
If you are so inclined, please be sure to forward all patches to
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="samba-patches@samba.org"
|
||||
HREF="mailto:samba-patches@samba.org"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>samba-patches@samba.org</A
|
||||
> and
|
||||
<A
|
||||
HREF="jerry@samba.org"
|
||||
HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>jerry@samba.org</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
@ -705,7 +705,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN384"
|
||||
NAME="AEN461"
|
||||
>3.6.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
owned by the Samba Team and as such is legal to be openly published.
|
||||
If you translate the schema to be used with Netscape DS, please
|
||||
submit the modified schema file as a patch to <A
|
||||
HREF="jerry@samba.org"
|
||||
HREF="mailto:jerry@samba.org"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>jerry@samba.org</A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
@ -762,7 +762,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN396"
|
||||
NAME="AEN473"
|
||||
>3.6.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -770,7 +770,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN398"
|
||||
NAME="AEN475"
|
||||
>3.6.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -780,9 +780,9 @@ server, first copy the samba.schema file to slapd's configuration directory.</P
|
||||
><SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>root# </SAMP
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>cp samba.schema /etc/openldap/schema/</B
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>cp samba.schema /etc/openldap/schema/</KBD
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Next, include the <TT
|
||||
@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN415"
|
||||
NAME="AEN492"
|
||||
>3.6.5.2. Configuring Samba</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -968,7 +968,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN443"
|
||||
NAME="AEN520"
|
||||
>3.6.6. Accounts and Groups management</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -993,7 +993,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN448"
|
||||
NAME="AEN525"
|
||||
>3.6.7. Security and sambaAccount</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1072,7 +1072,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN468"
|
||||
NAME="AEN545"
|
||||
>3.6.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1279,7 +1279,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN538"
|
||||
NAME="AEN615"
|
||||
>3.6.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1338,7 +1338,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN546"
|
||||
NAME="AEN623"
|
||||
>3.7. MySQL</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
@ -1346,29 +1346,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN548"
|
||||
>3.7.1. Building</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To build the plugin, run <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>make bin/pdb_mysql.so</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
in the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>source/</TT
|
||||
> directory of samba distribution. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Next, copy pdb_mysql.so to any location you want. I
|
||||
strongly recommend installing it in $PREFIX/lib or /usr/lib/samba/</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN554"
|
||||
>3.7.2. Creating the database</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN625"
|
||||
>3.7.1. Creating the database</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You either can set up your own table and specify the field names to pdb_mysql (see below
|
||||
@ -1403,8 +1382,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN564"
|
||||
>3.7.3. Configuring</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN635"
|
||||
>3.7.2. Configuring</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This plugin lacks some good documentation, but here is some short info:</P
|
||||
@ -1418,7 +1397,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>:
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>passdb backend = [other-plugins] plugin:/location/to/pdb_mysql.so:identifier [other-plugins]</PRE
|
||||
>passdb backend = [other-plugins] mysql:identifier [other-plugins]</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The identifier can be any string you like, as long as it doesn't collide with
|
||||
@ -1514,8 +1493,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN581"
|
||||
>3.7.4. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN652"
|
||||
>3.7.3. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>I strongly discourage the use of plaintext passwords, however, you can use them:</P
|
||||
@ -1529,8 +1508,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN586"
|
||||
>3.7.5. Getting non-column data from the table</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN657"
|
||||
>3.7.4. Getting non-column data from the table</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>It is possible to have not all data in the database and making some 'constant'.</P
|
||||
@ -1555,57 +1534,30 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN594"
|
||||
>3.8. Passdb XML plugin</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN665"
|
||||
>3.8. XML</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN596"
|
||||
>3.8.1. Building</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This module requires libxml2 to be installed.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To build pdb_xml, run: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>make bin/pdb_xml.so</B
|
||||
> in
|
||||
the directory <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>source/</TT
|
||||
>. </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN602"
|
||||
>3.8.2. Usage</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The usage of pdb_xml is pretty straightforward. To export data, use:
|
||||
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>pdbedit -e plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename</B
|
||||
<KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>pdbedit -e xml:filename</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
|
||||
(where filename is the name of the file to put the data in)</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To import data, use:
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>pdbedit -i plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename -e current-pdb</B
|
||||
<KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>pdbedit -i xml:filename -e current-pdb</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
|
||||
Where filename is the name to read the data from and current-pdb to put it in.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
|
||||
><HR
|
||||
|
@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>pdbedit</B
|
||||
> [-l] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-b passdb-backend] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-V value]</P
|
||||
> [-l] [-v] [-w] [-u username] [-f fullname] [-h homedir] [-D drive] [-S script] [-p profile] [-a] [-m] [-x] [-i passdb-backend] [-e passdb-backend] [-g] [-b passdb-backend] [-g] [-d debuglevel] [-s configfile] [-P account-policy] [-C value]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN30"
|
||||
NAME="AEN32"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN39"
|
||||
NAME="AEN41"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -336,6 +336,44 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-g</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you specify <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-g</VAR
|
||||
>,
|
||||
then <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-i in-backend -e out-backend</VAR
|
||||
>
|
||||
applies to the group mapping instead of the user database.
|
||||
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to
|
||||
another and will ease backing up.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-g</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you specify <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-g</VAR
|
||||
>,
|
||||
then <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-i in-backend -e out-backend</VAR
|
||||
>
|
||||
applies to the group mapping instead of the user database.
|
||||
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option will ease migration from one passdb backend to
|
||||
another and will ease backing up.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-b passdb-backend</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -367,7 +405,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V account-policy-value</DT
|
||||
>-C account-policy-value</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Sets an account policy to a specified value.
|
||||
@ -380,7 +418,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -V 3</B
|
||||
>pdbedit -P "bad lockout attempt" -C 3</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
@ -390,6 +428,42 @@ account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -429,30 +503,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -460,7 +519,7 @@ compile time.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN184"
|
||||
NAME="AEN210"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NOTES</H2
|
||||
@ -470,7 +529,7 @@ NAME="AEN184"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN187"
|
||||
NAME="AEN213"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -481,7 +540,7 @@ NAME="AEN187"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN190"
|
||||
NAME="AEN216"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -503,7 +562,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN199"
|
||||
NAME="AEN225"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PORTABILITY"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 24. Portability</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 28. Portability</H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Samba works on a wide range of platforms but the interface all the
|
||||
platforms provide is not always compatible. This chapter contains
|
||||
@ -84,8 +84,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3525"
|
||||
>24.1. HPUX</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4127"
|
||||
>28.1. HPUX</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for
|
||||
@ -114,8 +114,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3531"
|
||||
>24.2. SCO Unix</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4133"
|
||||
>28.2. SCO Unix</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>
|
||||
@ -131,8 +131,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3535"
|
||||
>24.3. DNIX</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4137"
|
||||
>28.3. DNIX</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are
|
||||
@ -238,8 +238,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3564"
|
||||
>24.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4166"
|
||||
>28.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default RedHat Rembrandt-II during installation adds an
|
||||
@ -262,16 +262,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3570"
|
||||
>24.5. AIX</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4172"
|
||||
>28.5. AIX</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3572"
|
||||
>24.5.1. Sequential Read Ahead</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4174"
|
||||
>28.5.1. Sequential Read Ahead</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Disabling Sequential Read Ahead using "vmtune -r 0" improves
|
||||
|
@ -13,9 +13,8 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring Group Mapping"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="CUPS Printing Support"
|
||||
HREF="cups-printing.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -46,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -75,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PRINTING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 14. Printing Support</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 12. Printing Support</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1946"
|
||||
>14.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1711"
|
||||
>12.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports
|
||||
@ -164,8 +163,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1968"
|
||||
>14.2. Configuration</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1733"
|
||||
>12.2. Configuration</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
@ -226,8 +225,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1976"
|
||||
>14.2.1. Creating [print$]</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1741"
|
||||
>12.2.1. Creating [print$]</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In order to support the uploading of printer driver
|
||||
@ -353,14 +352,14 @@ Samba follows this model as well.</P
|
||||
>Next create the directory tree below the [print$] share
|
||||
for each architecture you wish to support.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
><SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
|
||||
>[print$]-----
|
||||
|-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86"
|
||||
|-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98"
|
||||
|-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP"
|
||||
|-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000"
|
||||
|-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC"</PRE
|
||||
|-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC"</SAMP
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="WARNING"
|
||||
@ -443,8 +442,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2011"
|
||||
>14.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1776"
|
||||
>12.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's
|
||||
@ -515,8 +514,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2027"
|
||||
>14.2.3. Support a large number of printers</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1792"
|
||||
>12.2.3. Support a large number of printers</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One issue that has arisen during the development
|
||||
@ -535,13 +534,16 @@ setdriver command</B
|
||||
associated with an installed driver. The following is example
|
||||
of how this could be accomplished:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>
|
||||
<SAMP
|
||||
><SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </SAMP
|
||||
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumdrivers"
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumdrivers"</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>
|
||||
Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
|
||||
|
||||
[Windows NT x86]
|
||||
@ -552,27 +554,34 @@ Printer Driver Info 1:
|
||||
Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 2100 Series PS]
|
||||
|
||||
Printer Driver Info 1:
|
||||
Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS]
|
||||
|
||||
Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS]</PRE
|
||||
>
|
||||
<SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </SAMP
|
||||
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumprinters"
|
||||
Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumprinters"</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
|
||||
flags:[0x800000]
|
||||
name:[\\POGO\hp-print]
|
||||
description:[POGO\\POGO\hp-print,NO DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER,]
|
||||
comment:[]
|
||||
|
||||
</PRE
|
||||
>
|
||||
<SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>$ </SAMP
|
||||
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret \
|
||||
<SAMP
|
||||
CLASS="PROMPT"
|
||||
>> </SAMP
|
||||
> -c "setdriver hp-print \"HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS\""
|
||||
Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
|
||||
><KBD
|
||||
CLASS="USERINPUT"
|
||||
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "setdriver hp-print \"HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS\""</KBD
|
||||
>
|
||||
<PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
|
||||
Successfully set hp-print to driver HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS.</PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -581,8 +590,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2038"
|
||||
>14.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1807"
|
||||
>12.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT
|
||||
@ -736,8 +745,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2068"
|
||||
>14.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1837"
|
||||
>12.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally
|
||||
@ -771,8 +780,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2076"
|
||||
>14.3. The Imprints Toolset</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1845"
|
||||
>12.3. The Imprints Toolset</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the
|
||||
@ -789,8 +798,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2080"
|
||||
>14.3.1. What is Imprints?</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1849"
|
||||
>12.3.1. What is Imprints?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals
|
||||
@ -821,8 +830,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2090"
|
||||
>14.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1859"
|
||||
>12.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond
|
||||
@ -837,8 +846,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2093"
|
||||
>14.3.3. The Imprints server</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1862"
|
||||
>12.3.3. The Imprints server</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Imprints server is really a database server that
|
||||
@ -861,8 +870,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2097"
|
||||
>14.3.4. The Installation Client</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1866"
|
||||
>12.3.4. The Installation Client</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>More information regarding the Imprints installation client
|
||||
@ -955,16 +964,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2119"
|
||||
>14.4. Diagnosis</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1888"
|
||||
>12.4. Diagnosis</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2121"
|
||||
>14.4.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1890"
|
||||
>12.4.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with
|
||||
@ -1038,8 +1047,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2137"
|
||||
>14.4.2. Debugging printer problems</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1906"
|
||||
>12.4.2. Debugging printer problems</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these
|
||||
@ -1095,8 +1104,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2146"
|
||||
>14.4.3. What printers do I have?</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1915"
|
||||
>12.4.3. What printers do I have?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer
|
||||
@ -1124,8 +1133,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2154"
|
||||
>14.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1923"
|
||||
>12.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use.
|
||||
@ -1208,8 +1217,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2182"
|
||||
>14.4.5. Job sent, no output</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1951"
|
||||
>12.4.5. Job sent, no output</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the
|
||||
@ -1253,8 +1262,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2193"
|
||||
>14.4.6. Job sent, strange output</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1962"
|
||||
>12.4.6. Job sent, strange output</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about
|
||||
@ -1299,8 +1308,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2205"
|
||||
>14.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1974"
|
||||
>12.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling
|
||||
@ -1314,8 +1323,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2208"
|
||||
>14.4.8. Advanced Printing</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1977"
|
||||
>12.4.8. Advanced Printing</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your
|
||||
@ -1330,8 +1339,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2211"
|
||||
>14.4.9. Real debugging</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1980"
|
||||
>12.4.9. Real debugging</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in
|
||||
@ -1355,7 +1364,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1383,8 +1392,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
|
||||
managed authentication</TD
|
||||
>Configuring Group Mapping</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1193"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1267"
|
||||
>7.1. Prerequisite Reading</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1197"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1271"
|
||||
>7.2. Background</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1205"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1279"
|
||||
>7.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1208"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1282"
|
||||
>7.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1211"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1285"
|
||||
>7.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1214"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1288"
|
||||
>7.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT PDC?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1219"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1293"
|
||||
>7.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1236"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1310"
|
||||
>7.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1240"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1314"
|
||||
>7.5.2. Can I do this all with LDAP?</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN785"
|
||||
NAME="AEN859"
|
||||
>6.1. Prerequisite Reading</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN790"
|
||||
NAME="AEN864"
|
||||
>6.2. Background</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN830"
|
||||
NAME="AEN904"
|
||||
>6.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -413,8 +413,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Encrypted passwords must be enabled. For more details on how
|
||||
to do this, refer to <A
|
||||
HREF="ENCRYPTION.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
HREF="passdb.html"
|
||||
>ENCRYPTION.html</A
|
||||
>.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
@ -447,7 +446,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN872"
|
||||
NAME="AEN946"
|
||||
>6.4. Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the Domain</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -633,7 +632,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN915"
|
||||
NAME="AEN989"
|
||||
>6.4.1. Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -803,7 +802,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN956"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1030"
|
||||
>6.4.2. "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -840,7 +839,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN965"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1039"
|
||||
>6.4.3. Joining the Client to the Domain</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -908,7 +907,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN980"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1054"
|
||||
>6.5. Common Problems and Errors</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1107,7 +1106,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1026"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1100"
|
||||
>6.6. What other help can I get?</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1527,7 +1526,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1140"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1214"
|
||||
>6.7. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -1626,7 +1625,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1163"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1237"
|
||||
>6.7.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Unicode/Charsets"
|
||||
HREF="unicode.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SECURING-SAMBA"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 21. Securing Samba</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 23. Securing Samba</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3348"
|
||||
>21.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3884"
|
||||
>23.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This note was attached to the Samba 2.2.8 release notes as it contained an
|
||||
@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3351"
|
||||
>21.2. Using host based protection</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3887"
|
||||
>23.2. Using host based protection</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>In many installations of Samba the greatest threat comes for outside
|
||||
@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3358"
|
||||
>21.3. Using interface protection</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3894"
|
||||
>23.3. Using interface protection</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default Samba will accept connections on any network interface that
|
||||
@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3367"
|
||||
>21.4. Using a firewall</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3903"
|
||||
>23.4. Using a firewall</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Many people use a firewall to deny access to services that they don't
|
||||
@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3374"
|
||||
>21.5. Using a IPC$ share deny</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3910"
|
||||
>23.5. Using a IPC$ share deny</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the above methods are not suitable, then you could also place a
|
||||
@ -230,8 +230,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3383"
|
||||
>21.6. Upgrading Samba</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3919"
|
||||
>23.6. Upgrading Samba</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Please check regularly on http://www.samba.org/ for updates and
|
||||
@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="vfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
|
||||
>Improved browsing in samba</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
|
@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN681"
|
||||
NAME="AEN752"
|
||||
>5.1. User and Share security level</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN684"
|
||||
NAME="AEN755"
|
||||
>5.1.1. User Level Security</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN694"
|
||||
NAME="AEN765"
|
||||
>5.1.2. Share Level Security</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN698"
|
||||
NAME="AEN769"
|
||||
>5.1.3. Server Level Security</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN703"
|
||||
NAME="AEN774"
|
||||
>5.1.3.1. Configuring Samba for Seemless Windows Network Integration</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -327,7 +327,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN729"
|
||||
NAME="AEN800"
|
||||
>5.1.3.2. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN737"
|
||||
NAME="AEN808"
|
||||
>5.1.4. Domain Level Security</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN741"
|
||||
NAME="AEN812"
|
||||
>5.1.4.1. Samba as a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN758"
|
||||
NAME="AEN829"
|
||||
>5.1.5. ADS Level Security</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
|
@ -426,18 +426,42 @@ CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
|
||||
first entry of a printcap record. Records are separated by newlines,
|
||||
components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical
|
||||
bar symbols ('|').</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE: On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what
|
||||
printers are defined on the system you may be able to use
|
||||
"printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list
|
||||
of printers. See the "printcap name" option
|
||||
for more details.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN103"
|
||||
NAME="AEN104"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>PARAMETERS</H2
|
||||
@ -495,7 +519,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN113"
|
||||
NAME="AEN114"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -694,7 +718,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN206"
|
||||
NAME="AEN207"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NAME MANGLING</H2
|
||||
@ -799,7 +823,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN239"
|
||||
NAME="AEN240"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</H2
|
||||
@ -875,7 +899,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN258"
|
||||
NAME="AEN259"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS</H2
|
||||
@ -1468,6 +1492,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#LDAPDELETEDN"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>ldap delete dn</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#LDAPFILTER"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
@ -2168,6 +2202,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#PRELOADMODULES"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>preload modules</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#PRINTCAP"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
@ -2318,6 +2362,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#SERVERSCHANNEL"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>server schannel</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#SERVERSTRING"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
@ -2328,6 +2382,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>set primary group script</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
@ -2780,7 +2844,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1018"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1035"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2
|
||||
@ -4015,7 +4079,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1510"
|
||||
NAME="AEN1527"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2
|
||||
@ -5218,7 +5282,7 @@ NAME="CASESENSITIVE"
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the discussion in the section <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
>NAME MANGLING</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -5818,7 +5882,7 @@ NAME="DEFAULTCASE"
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the section on <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
> NAME MANGLING</A
|
||||
>. Also note the <A
|
||||
HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE"
|
||||
@ -6915,7 +6979,7 @@ NAME="DOSCHARSET"
|
||||
charset Samba should talk to DOS clients.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default depends on which charsets you have instaled.
|
||||
>The default depends on which charsets you have installed.
|
||||
Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in
|
||||
case it is not available. Run <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
@ -8056,15 +8120,33 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
the first ':'. There should probably be a better parsing system
|
||||
that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another
|
||||
automounter) maps.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOTE :</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>A working NIS client is required on
|
||||
the system for this option to work.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See also <A
|
||||
HREF="#NISHOMEDIR"
|
||||
@ -8337,14 +8419,28 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> hosts equiv</VAR
|
||||
> may be useful for NT clients which will
|
||||
not supply passwords to Samba.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOTE :</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> The use of <VAR
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The use of <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>hosts equiv
|
||||
</VAR
|
||||
@ -8364,6 +8460,10 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> trust
|
||||
them :-).</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
@ -8875,14 +8975,25 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</SPAN
|
||||
>(8)</SPAN
|
||||
> man page for more information on how
|
||||
to accmplish this.
|
||||
to accmplish this.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="LDAPDELETEDN"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>ldap delete dn (G)</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> This parameter specifies whether a delete
|
||||
operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes
|
||||
specific to Samba.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default : <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>none</I
|
||||
>ldap delete dn = no</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
@ -10445,7 +10556,7 @@ NAME="MANGLECASE"
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the section on <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
> NAME MANGLING</A
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -10521,7 +10632,7 @@ NAME="MANGLEDNAMES"
|
||||
or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the section on <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
> NAME MANGLING</A
|
||||
> for details on how to control the mangling process.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -10695,7 +10806,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>magic</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> character in <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
>name mangling</A
|
||||
>. The default is a '~'
|
||||
but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set
|
||||
@ -11958,11 +12069,35 @@ NAME="NONUNIXACCOUNTRANGE"
|
||||
This is most often used for machine account creation.
|
||||
This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within
|
||||
it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>NOTE: These userids never appear on the system and Samba will never
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>These userids never appear on the system and Samba will never
|
||||
'become' these users. They are used only to ensure that the algorithmic
|
||||
RID mapping does not conflict with normal users.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -13151,17 +13286,31 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> and so may resolved
|
||||
by any method and order described in that parameter.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The password server much be a machine capable of using
|
||||
>The password server must be a machine capable of using
|
||||
the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in
|
||||
user level security mode.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOTE:</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> Using a password server
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Using a password server
|
||||
means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your
|
||||
password server. <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
@ -13171,6 +13320,10 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Never point a Samba server at itself for password
|
||||
serving. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba
|
||||
@ -13631,6 +13784,30 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PRELOADMODULES"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>preload modules (G)</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This is a list of paths to modules that should
|
||||
be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves
|
||||
the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>It is recommended to only use this option on heavy-performance
|
||||
servers.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preload modules = </B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>preload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="PRESERVECASE"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>preserve case (S)</DT
|
||||
@ -13653,7 +13830,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the section on <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
>NAME
|
||||
MANGLING</A
|
||||
> for a fuller discussion.</P
|
||||
@ -13950,14 +14127,28 @@ print5|My Printer 5</PRE
|
||||
>where the '|' separates aliases of a printer. The fact
|
||||
that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba
|
||||
that it's a comment.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOTE</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>: Under AIX the default printcap
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Under AIX the default printcap
|
||||
name is <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/qconfig</TT
|
||||
@ -13970,6 +14161,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>qconfig</TT
|
||||
> appears in the printcap filename.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -15080,7 +15275,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
be used in granting access.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See also the section <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN239"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN240"
|
||||
> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -15161,7 +15356,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> parameter for details on doing this.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See also the section <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN239"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN240"
|
||||
> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -15260,7 +15455,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> parameter for details on doing this.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See also the section <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN239"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN240"
|
||||
> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -15395,7 +15590,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
> parameter for details on doing this.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See also the section <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN239"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN240"
|
||||
> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -15496,6 +15691,51 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SERVERSCHANNEL"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>server schannel (G)</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This controls whether the server offers or even
|
||||
demands the use of the netlogon schannel.
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>server schannel = no</VAR
|
||||
> does not
|
||||
offer the schannel, <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>server schannel =
|
||||
auto</VAR
|
||||
> offers the schannel but does not
|
||||
enforce it, and <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>server schannel =
|
||||
yes</VAR
|
||||
> denies access if the client is not
|
||||
able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case
|
||||
for Windows NT4 before SP4.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Please note that with this set to
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>no</VAR
|
||||
> you will have to apply the
|
||||
WindowsXP requireSignOrSeal-Registry patch found in
|
||||
the docs/Registry subdirectory.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>server schannel = auto</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>server schannel = yes</B
|
||||
>/para>
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SERVERSTRING"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>server string (G)</DT
|
||||
@ -15537,6 +15777,48 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>set primary group script (G)</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a
|
||||
Windows User has a primary group in addition to the
|
||||
auxiliary groups. This script sets the primary group
|
||||
in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the
|
||||
primary group from the windows user manager or when
|
||||
fetching a SAM with <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>net rpc
|
||||
vampire</B
|
||||
>. <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>%u</VAR
|
||||
> will be
|
||||
replaced with the user whose primary group is to be
|
||||
set. <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>%g</VAR
|
||||
> will be replaced with
|
||||
the group to set.
|
||||
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>No default value</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>set primary group script = /usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SETDIRECTORY"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>>set directory (S)</DT
|
||||
@ -15649,7 +15931,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
names are lowered. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the section on <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN206"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN207"
|
||||
> NAME MANGLING</A
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -16851,7 +17133,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
search.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the section <A
|
||||
HREF="#AEN239"
|
||||
HREF="#AEN240"
|
||||
>NOTE ABOUT
|
||||
USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</A
|
||||
> for more information on how
|
||||
@ -17868,22 +18150,45 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
|
||||
multi-subnetted network.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>NOTE</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
>. You need to set up Samba to point
|
||||
>If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can
|
||||
give every wins server a 'tag'. For each tag, only one
|
||||
(working) server will be queried for a name. The tag should be
|
||||
seperated from the ip address by a colon.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>You need to set up Samba to point
|
||||
to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet
|
||||
browsing to work correctly.</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the documentation file <A
|
||||
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>BROWSING</A
|
||||
>
|
||||
in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P
|
||||
>Browsing</A
|
||||
> in the samba howto collection.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Default: <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
@ -17895,7 +18200,17 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins server = 192.9.200.1</B
|
||||
>wins server = mary:192.9.200.1 fred:192.168.3.199 mary:192.168.2.61</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>For this example when querying a certain name, 192.19.200.1 will
|
||||
be asked first and if that doesn't respond 192.168.2.61. If either
|
||||
of those doesn't know the name 192.168.3.199 will be queried.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Example: <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wins server = 192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
@ -18146,7 +18461,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN6228"
|
||||
NAME="AEN6291"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>WARNINGS</H2
|
||||
@ -18177,7 +18492,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN6236"
|
||||
NAME="AEN6299"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -18187,7 +18502,7 @@ NAME="AEN6236"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN6239"
|
||||
NAME="AEN6302"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -18251,7 +18566,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN6269"
|
||||
NAME="AEN6332"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbcacls</B
|
||||
> {//server/share} {filename} [-U username] [-A acls] [-M acls] [-D acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [-n] [-h]</P
|
||||
> {//server/share} {filename} [-D acls] [-M acls] [-A acls] [-S acls] [-C name] [-G name] [-n] [-t] [-U username] [-h] [-d]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN22"
|
||||
NAME="AEN24"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN30"
|
||||
NAME="AEN32"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -168,14 +168,98 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
and masks to a readable string format. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h</DT
|
||||
>-t</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print usage information on the <B
|
||||
> Don't actually do anything, only validate the correctness of
|
||||
the arguments.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbcacls
|
||||
</B
|
||||
> program.</P
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -183,7 +267,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN79"
|
||||
NAME="AEN111"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>ACL FORMAT</H2
|
||||
@ -367,7 +451,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN133"
|
||||
NAME="AEN165"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXIT STATUS</H2
|
||||
@ -391,17 +475,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN139"
|
||||
NAME="AEN171"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN142"
|
||||
NAME="AEN174"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -172,34 +172,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s smb.conf</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Specifies the location of the all
|
||||
important <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-O socket options</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>TCP socket options to set on the client
|
||||
socket. See the socket options parameter in
|
||||
the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> manual page for the list of valid
|
||||
options. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-R <name resolve order></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -369,102 +341,6 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
messages. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i scope</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that smbclient will
|
||||
use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names. For details
|
||||
on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>rfc1001.txt</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>rfc1002.txt</TT
|
||||
>.
|
||||
NetBIOS scopes are <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>very</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> rarely used, only set
|
||||
this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all
|
||||
the NetBIOS systems you communicate with. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-N</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal
|
||||
password prompt from the client to the user. This is useful when
|
||||
accessing a service that does not require a password. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Unless a password is specified on the command line or
|
||||
this parameter is specified, the client will request a
|
||||
password.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-n NetBIOS name</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>By default, the client will use the local
|
||||
machine's hostname (in uppercase) as its NetBIOS name. This parameter
|
||||
allows you to override the host name and use whatever NetBIOS
|
||||
name you wish. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer from 0 to 10, or
|
||||
the letter 'A'. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default value if this parameter is not specified
|
||||
is zero. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to
|
||||
the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
client. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will
|
||||
be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day to day running -
|
||||
it generates a small amount of information about operations
|
||||
carried out. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log
|
||||
data, and should only be used when investigating a problem.
|
||||
Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and
|
||||
generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely
|
||||
cryptic. If <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is set to the letter 'A', then <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>all
|
||||
</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> debug messages will be printed. This setting
|
||||
is for developers only (and people who <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>really</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> want
|
||||
to know how the code works internally). </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will override
|
||||
the log level parameter in the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf (5)</TT
|
||||
>
|
||||
file. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-p port</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -497,10 +373,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h</DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print the usage message for the client. </P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-I IP-address</DT
|
||||
@ -539,86 +415,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
- typically the user's tty. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-U username[%pass]</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Sets the SMB username or username and password.
|
||||
If %pass is not specified, The user will be prompted. The client
|
||||
will first check the <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
>USER</VAR
|
||||
> environment variable, then the
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
>LOGNAME</VAR
|
||||
> variable and if either exists, the
|
||||
string is uppercased. Anything in these variables following a '%'
|
||||
sign will be treated as the password. If these environment
|
||||
variables are not found, the username <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>GUEST</CODE
|
||||
>
|
||||
is used. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the password is not included in these environment
|
||||
variables (using the %pass syntax), <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbclient</B
|
||||
> will look for
|
||||
a <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
>PASSWD</VAR
|
||||
> environment variable from which
|
||||
to read the password. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A third option is to use a credentials file which
|
||||
contains the plaintext of the domain name, username and password. This
|
||||
option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin doesn't
|
||||
wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment
|
||||
variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions
|
||||
on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-A</VAR
|
||||
> for more details. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts or in
|
||||
the <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
>PASSWD</VAR
|
||||
> environment variable. Also, on
|
||||
many systems the command line of a running process may be seen
|
||||
via the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>ps</B
|
||||
> command to be safe always allow
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbclient</B
|
||||
> to prompt for a password and type
|
||||
it in directly. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-A filename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option allows
|
||||
you to specify a file from which to read the username, domain name, and
|
||||
password used in the connection. The format of the file is
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>username = <value>
|
||||
password = <value>
|
||||
domain = <value></PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If the domain parameter is missing the current workgroup name
|
||||
is used instead. Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict
|
||||
access from unwanted users. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-L</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -680,18 +476,241 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-W WORKGROUP</DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Override the default workgroup (domain) specified
|
||||
in the workgroup parameter of the <SPAN
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-N</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal
|
||||
password prompt from the client to the user. This is useful when
|
||||
accessing a service that does not require a password. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Unless a password is specified on the command line or
|
||||
this parameter is specified, the client will request a
|
||||
password.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-k</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in
|
||||
an Active Directory environment.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-A|--authfile=filename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option allows
|
||||
you to specify a file from which to read the username and
|
||||
password used in the connection. The format of the file is</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><PRE
|
||||
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
|
||||
>username = <value>
|
||||
password = <value>
|
||||
domain = <value></PRE
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict
|
||||
access from unwanted users. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-U|--user=username[%password]</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Sets the SMB username or username and password. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted. The
|
||||
client will first check the <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
>USER</VAR
|
||||
> environment variable, then the
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
>LOGNAME</VAR
|
||||
> variable and if either exists, the
|
||||
string is uppercased. If these environmental variables are not
|
||||
found, the username <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>GUEST</CODE
|
||||
> is used. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A third option is to use a credentials file which
|
||||
contains the plaintext of the username and password. This
|
||||
option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not
|
||||
wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment
|
||||
variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions
|
||||
on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>-A</VAR
|
||||
> for more details. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts. Also, on
|
||||
many systems the command line of a running process may be seen
|
||||
via the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>ps</B
|
||||
> command. To be safe always allow
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>rpcclient</B
|
||||
> to prompt for a password and type
|
||||
it in directly. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-n <primary NetBIOS name></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option allows you to override
|
||||
the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself. This is identical
|
||||
to setting the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>NetBIOS
|
||||
name</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file for this connection. This may be
|
||||
needed to connect to some servers. </P
|
||||
> file. However, a command
|
||||
line setting will take precedence over settings in
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i <scope></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmblookup</B
|
||||
> will use to communicate with when
|
||||
generating NetBIOS names. For details on the use of NetBIOS
|
||||
scopes, see rfc1001.txt and rfc1002.txt. NetBIOS scopes are
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>very</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> rarely used, only set this parameter
|
||||
if you are the system administrator in charge of all the
|
||||
NetBIOS systems you communicate with.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-W|--workgroup=domain</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Set the SMB domain of the username. This
|
||||
overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in
|
||||
smb.conf. If the domain specified is the same as the servers
|
||||
NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local
|
||||
SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM). </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-O socket options</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>TCP socket options to set on the client
|
||||
socket. See the socket options parameter in
|
||||
the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> manual page for the list of valid
|
||||
options. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-T tar options</DT
|
||||
@ -958,21 +977,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>-c 'print -'</B
|
||||
>. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-k</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Try to authenticate with kerberos. Only useful in
|
||||
an Active Directory environment.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN336"
|
||||
NAME="AEN344"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPERATIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -1438,7 +1449,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN527"
|
||||
NAME="AEN535"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NOTES</H2
|
||||
@ -1459,7 +1470,7 @@ NAME="AEN527"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN532"
|
||||
NAME="AEN540"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
|
||||
@ -1492,7 +1503,7 @@ CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN540"
|
||||
NAME="AEN548"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>INSTALLATION</H2
|
||||
@ -1536,7 +1547,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN552"
|
||||
NAME="AEN560"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DIAGNOSTICS</H2
|
||||
@ -1552,7 +1563,7 @@ NAME="AEN552"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN556"
|
||||
NAME="AEN564"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -1562,7 +1573,7 @@ NAME="AEN556"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN559"
|
||||
NAME="AEN567"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbcontrol</B
|
||||
> [-i]</P
|
||||
> [-i] [-s]</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN17"
|
||||
NAME="AEN18"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN34"
|
||||
NAME="AEN35"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -97,6 +97,32 @@ NAME="AEN34"
|
||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -140,170 +166,11 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>message-type</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One of: <CODE
|
||||
>Type of message to send. See
|
||||
the section <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>close-share</CODE
|
||||
>,
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>debug</CODE
|
||||
>,
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>force-election</CODE
|
||||
>, <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>ping
|
||||
</CODE
|
||||
>, <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>profile</CODE
|
||||
>, <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
> debuglevel</CODE
|
||||
>, <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>profilelevel</CODE
|
||||
>,
|
||||
or <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>printnotify</CODE
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>close-share</CODE
|
||||
> message-type sends a
|
||||
message to smbd which will then close the client connections to
|
||||
the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections
|
||||
to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the
|
||||
share name for which client connections will be closed, or the
|
||||
"*" character which will close all currently open shares.
|
||||
This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share.
|
||||
This message can only be sent to <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>smbd</CODE
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>debug</CODE
|
||||
> message-type allows
|
||||
the debug level to be set to the value specified by the
|
||||
parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>force-election</CODE
|
||||
> message-type can only be
|
||||
sent to the <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>nmbd</CODE
|
||||
> destination. This message
|
||||
causes the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
> daemon to force a new browse
|
||||
master election.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>ping</CODE
|
||||
> message-type sends the
|
||||
number of "ping" messages specified by the parameter and waits
|
||||
for the same number of reply "pong" messages. This can be sent to
|
||||
any of the destinations.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>profile</CODE
|
||||
> message-type sends a
|
||||
message to an smbd to change the profile settings based on the
|
||||
parameter. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats
|
||||
collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count"
|
||||
to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are
|
||||
disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats. This can
|
||||
be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>debuglevel</CODE
|
||||
> message-type sends
|
||||
a "request debug level" message. The current debug level setting
|
||||
is returned by a "debuglevel" message. This can be
|
||||
sent to any of the destinations.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>profilelevel</CODE
|
||||
> message-type sends
|
||||
a "request profile level" message. The current profile level
|
||||
setting is returned by a "profilelevel" message. This can be sent
|
||||
to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>printnotify</CODE
|
||||
> message-type sends a
|
||||
message to smbd which in turn sends a printer notify message to
|
||||
any Windows NT clients connected to a printer. This message-type
|
||||
takes the following arguments:
|
||||
|
||||
<P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>queuepause printername</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a queue pause change notify
|
||||
message to the printer specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>queueresume printername</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a queue resume change notify
|
||||
message for the printer specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>jobpause printername unixjobid</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a job pause change notify
|
||||
message for the printer and unix jobid
|
||||
specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>jobresume printername unixjobid</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a job resume change notify
|
||||
message for the printer and unix jobid
|
||||
specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>jobdelete printername unixjobid</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a job delete change notify
|
||||
message for the printer and unix jobid
|
||||
specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
>
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this message only sends notification that an
|
||||
event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the
|
||||
event to happen.
|
||||
|
||||
This message can only be sent to <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>smbd</CODE
|
||||
>.
|
||||
>MESSAGE-TYPES</CODE
|
||||
> for details.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
@ -318,18 +185,242 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN110"
|
||||
NAME="AEN73"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>MESSAGE-TYPES</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Available message types are:</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>close-share</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Order smbd to close the client
|
||||
connections to the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client
|
||||
connections to any other shares. This message-type takes an argument of the
|
||||
share name for which client connections will be closed, or the
|
||||
"*" character which will close all currently open shares.
|
||||
This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share.
|
||||
This message can only be sent to <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>smbd</CODE
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>debug</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Set debug level to the value specified by the
|
||||
parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>force-election</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This message causes the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>nmbd</B
|
||||
> daemon to
|
||||
force a new browse master election. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>ping</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Send specified number of "ping" messages and
|
||||
wait for the same number of reply "pong" messages. This can be sent to
|
||||
any of the destinations.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>profile</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Change profile settings of a daemon, based on the
|
||||
parameter. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats
|
||||
collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count"
|
||||
to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are
|
||||
disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats. This can
|
||||
be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Request debuglevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout. This
|
||||
can be sent to any of the destinations.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>profilelevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Request profilelevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout.
|
||||
This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>printnotify</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Order smbd to send a printer notify message to any Windows NT clients
|
||||
connected to a printer. This message-type takes the following arguments:
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>queuepause printername</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a queue pause change notify
|
||||
message to the printer specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>queueresume printername</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a queue resume change notify
|
||||
message for the printer specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>jobpause printername unixjobid</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a job pause change notify
|
||||
message for the printer and unix jobid
|
||||
specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>jobresume printername unixjobid</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a job resume change notify
|
||||
message for the printer and unix jobid
|
||||
specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>jobdelete printername unixjobid</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send a job delete change notify
|
||||
message for the printer and unix jobid
|
||||
specified.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Note that this message only sends notification that an
|
||||
event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the
|
||||
event to happen.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This message can only be sent to <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>smbd</CODE
|
||||
>. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>samsync</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC). Can only be sent to <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>smbd</CODE
|
||||
>. </P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="90%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Not working at the moment</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>samrepl</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Send sam replication message, with specified serial. Can only be sent to <CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>smbd</CODE
|
||||
>. Should not be used manually.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>dmalloc-mark</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Set a mark for dmalloc. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>dmalloc-log-changed</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Dump the pointers that have changed since the mark set by dmalloc-mark.
|
||||
Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>shutdown</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Shut down specified daemon. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>tallocdump and pool-usage</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a human-readable description of all
|
||||
talloc(pool) memory usage by the specified daemon/process. Available
|
||||
for both smbd and nmbd.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>drvupgrade</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Force clients of printers using specified driver
|
||||
to update their local version of the driver. Can only be
|
||||
sent to smbd.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN167"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN113"
|
||||
NAME="AEN170"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -351,7 +442,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN122"
|
||||
NAME="AEN179"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -200,24 +200,90 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h</DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the help information (usage)
|
||||
for <B
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-b</DT
|
||||
@ -227,47 +293,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
Samba was built.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d <debug level></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> parameter in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l <log directory></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -312,26 +337,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-O <socket options></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>See the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>socket options</VAR
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>
|
||||
parameter in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file for details.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-p <port number></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -360,32 +365,13 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>This parameter is not normally specified except
|
||||
in the above situation.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN135"
|
||||
NAME="AEN127"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>FILES</H2
|
||||
@ -493,7 +479,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN173"
|
||||
NAME="AEN165"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>LIMITATIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -512,7 +498,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN177"
|
||||
NAME="AEN169"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
|
||||
@ -543,7 +529,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN186"
|
||||
NAME="AEN178"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>PAM INTERACTION</H2
|
||||
@ -604,7 +590,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN201"
|
||||
NAME="AEN193"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -615,7 +601,7 @@ NAME="AEN201"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN204"
|
||||
NAME="AEN196"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DIAGNOSTICS</H2
|
||||
@ -638,7 +624,7 @@ NAME="AEN204"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN209"
|
||||
NAME="AEN201"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SIGNALS</H2
|
||||
@ -705,7 +691,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN227"
|
||||
NAME="AEN219"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -771,7 +757,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN254"
|
||||
NAME="AEN246"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbmnt</B
|
||||
> {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>]</P
|
||||
> {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>] [-h]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN19"
|
||||
NAME="AEN20"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN31"
|
||||
NAME="AEN32"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -131,13 +131,19 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
command is run on a 2.4 or higher Linux kernel.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN58"
|
||||
NAME="AEN63"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -181,6 +181,12 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>krb</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Use kerberos (Active Directory). </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>netbiosname=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -224,7 +230,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>dmask=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets the directory mask. This determines the
|
||||
>Sets the directory mask. This determines the
|
||||
permissions that remote directories have in the local filesystem.
|
||||
The default is based on the current umask. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
@ -232,7 +238,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>debug=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets the debug level. This is useful for
|
||||
>Sets the debug level. This is useful for
|
||||
tracking down SMB connection problems. A suggested value to
|
||||
start with is 4. If set too high there will be a lot of
|
||||
output, possibly hiding the useful output.</P
|
||||
@ -241,20 +247,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>ip=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets the destination host or IP address.
|
||||
>Sets the destination host or IP address.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>workgroup=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets the workgroup on the destination </P
|
||||
>Sets the workgroup on the destination </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>sockopt=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets the TCP socket options. See the <A
|
||||
>Sets the TCP socket options. See the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETOPTIONS"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
@ -274,13 +280,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>scope=<arg></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets the NetBIOS scope </P
|
||||
>Sets the NetBIOS scope </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>guest</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>don't prompt for a password </P
|
||||
>Don't prompt for a password </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>ro</DT
|
||||
@ -334,7 +340,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN130"
|
||||
NAME="AEN134"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
|
||||
@ -366,7 +372,7 @@ CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN138"
|
||||
NAME="AEN142"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>BUGS</H2
|
||||
@ -401,7 +407,7 @@ NAME="AEN138"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN147"
|
||||
NAME="AEN151"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -423,7 +429,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN155"
|
||||
NAME="AEN159"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -130,16 +130,75 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-R <name resolve order></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This option is used to determine what naming
|
||||
services and in what order to resolve
|
||||
host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated
|
||||
string of different name resolution options.</P
|
||||
services and in what order to resolve
|
||||
host names to IP addresses. The option takes a space-separated
|
||||
string of different name resolution options.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast".
|
||||
They cause names to be resolved as follows :</P
|
||||
They cause names to be resolved as follows :</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><UL
|
||||
@ -149,18 +208,17 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>lmhosts</CODE
|
||||
>:
|
||||
Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the
|
||||
line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the
|
||||
NetBIOS name
|
||||
(see the <SPAN
|
||||
Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the
|
||||
line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the
|
||||
NetBIOS name
|
||||
(see the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>lmhosts</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> for details)
|
||||
then any name type matches for lookup.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
then any name type matches for lookup.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -168,21 +226,19 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>host</CODE
|
||||
>:
|
||||
Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using
|
||||
the system <TT
|
||||
Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using
|
||||
the system <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/hosts</TT
|
||||
>, NIS, or DNS
|
||||
lookups. This method of name resolution is operating
|
||||
system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this
|
||||
may be controlled by the <TT
|
||||
lookups. This method of name resolution is operating
|
||||
system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this
|
||||
may be controlled by the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/nsswitch.conf
|
||||
</TT
|
||||
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
|
||||
> file). Note that this method is only used
|
||||
if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20
|
||||
(server) name type, otherwise it is ignored.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20
|
||||
(server) name type, otherwise it is ignored.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -190,14 +246,13 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>wins</CODE
|
||||
>:
|
||||
Query a name with the IP address listed in the
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
Query a name with the IP address listed in the
|
||||
<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>wins server</VAR
|
||||
> parameter. If no
|
||||
WINS server has been specified this method will be
|
||||
ignored.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
WINS server has been specified this method will be
|
||||
ignored.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
><LI
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -205,36 +260,34 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>bcast</CODE
|
||||
>:
|
||||
Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
|
||||
listed in the <VAR
|
||||
Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
|
||||
listed in the <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>interfaces</VAR
|
||||
>
|
||||
parameter. This is the least reliable of the name
|
||||
resolution methods as it depends on the target host
|
||||
being on a locally connected subnet.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
parameter. This is the least reliable of the name
|
||||
resolution methods as it depends on the target host
|
||||
being on a locally connected subnet.</P
|
||||
></LI
|
||||
></UL
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order
|
||||
defined in the <SPAN
|
||||
defined in the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file parameter
|
||||
(<VAR
|
||||
(<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>name resolve order</VAR
|
||||
>) will be used. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast. Without
|
||||
this parameter or any entry in the <VAR
|
||||
this parameter or any entry in the <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
>name resolve order
|
||||
</VAR
|
||||
>name resolve order</VAR
|
||||
> parameter of the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
@ -242,43 +295,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file, the name resolution methods
|
||||
will be attempted in this order. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d <debug level></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>debug level is an integer from 0 to 10.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default value if this parameter is not specified
|
||||
is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be logged
|
||||
about the activities of <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>nmblookup</SPAN
|
||||
>(1)</SPAN
|
||||
>. At level
|
||||
0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l logfilename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If specified causes all debug messages to be
|
||||
written to the file specified by <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>logfilename
|
||||
</VAR
|
||||
>. If not specified then all messages will be
|
||||
written to<VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>stderr</VAR
|
||||
>.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
will be attempted in this order. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-L libdir</DT
|
||||
@ -298,7 +315,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN104"
|
||||
NAME="AEN106"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXAMPLES</H2
|
||||
@ -371,7 +388,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN124"
|
||||
NAME="AEN126"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -381,7 +398,7 @@ NAME="AEN124"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN127"
|
||||
NAME="AEN129"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>BUGS</H2
|
||||
@ -414,7 +431,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN136"
|
||||
NAME="AEN138"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -436,7 +453,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN145"
|
||||
NAME="AEN147"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbspool</B
|
||||
> [job] [user] [title] [copies] [options] [filename]</P
|
||||
> {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ NAME="AEN56"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
|
@ -88,10 +88,84 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
>gives brief output.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=<debuglevel></DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>sets debugging to specified level</P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-v|--verbose</DT
|
||||
@ -132,18 +206,10 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>causes smbstatus to only list shares.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s|--conf=<configuration file></DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The default configuration file name is
|
||||
determined at compile time. The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. See <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> for more information.</P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-u|--user=<username></DT
|
||||
@ -161,7 +227,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN79"
|
||||
NAME="AEN99"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -172,7 +238,7 @@ NAME="AEN79"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN82"
|
||||
NAME="AEN102"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -194,7 +260,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN91"
|
||||
NAME="AEN111"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbtar</B
|
||||
> {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-d directory] [-u user] [-t tape] [-t tape] [-b blocksize] [-N filename] [-i] [-r] [-l loglevel] [-v] {filenames}</P
|
||||
> [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename] [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
@ -132,6 +132,13 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
UNIX login name. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-a</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Reset DOS archive bit mode to
|
||||
indicate file has been archived. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-t tape</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -201,7 +208,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN100"
|
||||
NAME="AEN104"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
|
||||
@ -216,7 +223,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN104"
|
||||
NAME="AEN108"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>BUGS</H2
|
||||
@ -230,7 +237,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN108"
|
||||
NAME="AEN112"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>CAVEATS</H2
|
||||
@ -243,7 +250,7 @@ NAME="AEN108"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN111"
|
||||
NAME="AEN115"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DIAGNOSTICS</H2
|
||||
@ -265,7 +272,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN118"
|
||||
NAME="AEN122"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -276,7 +283,7 @@ NAME="AEN118"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN121"
|
||||
NAME="AEN125"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -304,7 +311,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN133"
|
||||
NAME="AEN137"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Appendixes"
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC"
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Portability"
|
||||
HREF="portability.html"></HEAD
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="SPEED"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 23. Samba performance issues</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 27. Samba performance issues</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3443"
|
||||
>23.1. Comparisons</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4041"
|
||||
>27.1. Comparisons</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Samba server uses TCP to talk to the client. Thus if you are
|
||||
@ -111,8 +111,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3449"
|
||||
>23.2. Socket options</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4047"
|
||||
>27.2. Socket options</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>There are a number of socket options that can greatly affect the
|
||||
@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3456"
|
||||
>23.3. Read size</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4054"
|
||||
>27.3. Read size</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with
|
||||
@ -165,8 +165,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3461"
|
||||
>23.4. Max xmit</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4059"
|
||||
>27.4. Max xmit</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>At startup the client and server negotiate a "maximum transmit" size,
|
||||
@ -188,8 +188,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3466"
|
||||
>23.5. Log level</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4064"
|
||||
>27.5. Log level</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you set the log level (also known as "debug level") higher than 2
|
||||
@ -202,8 +202,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3469"
|
||||
>23.6. Read raw</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4067"
|
||||
>27.6. Read raw</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "read raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
|
||||
@ -224,8 +224,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3474"
|
||||
>23.7. Write raw</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4072"
|
||||
>27.7. Write raw</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The "write raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
|
||||
@ -241,8 +241,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3478"
|
||||
>23.8. Slow Clients</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4076"
|
||||
>27.8. Slow Clients</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>One person has reported that setting the protocol to COREPLUS rather
|
||||
@ -258,8 +258,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3482"
|
||||
>23.9. Slow Logins</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4080"
|
||||
>27.9. Slow Logins</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using
|
||||
@ -271,8 +271,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3485"
|
||||
>23.10. Client tuning</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN4083"
|
||||
>27.10. Client tuning</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for
|
||||
@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="appendixes.html"
|
||||
HREF="nt4migration.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -417,7 +417,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Appendixes</TD
|
||||
>Migration from NT4 PDC to Samba-3 PDC</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
|
@ -145,17 +145,109 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
></P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN49"
|
||||
NAME="AEN80"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>INSTALLATION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Swat is included as binary package with most distributions. The
|
||||
package manager in this case takes care of the installation and
|
||||
configuration. This section is only for those who have compiled
|
||||
swat from scratch.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>After you compile SWAT you need to run <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>make install
|
||||
@ -185,7 +277,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN61"
|
||||
NAME="AEN93"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
>Inetd Installation</H3
|
||||
@ -214,7 +306,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>swat 901/tcp</B
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note for NIS/YP users - you may need to rebuild the
|
||||
>Note for NIS/YP and LDAP users - you may need to rebuild the
|
||||
NIS service maps rather than alter your local <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> /etc/services</TT
|
||||
@ -255,27 +347,27 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
</B
|
||||
> where PID is the process ID of the inetd daemon. </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN83"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
>Launching</H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and
|
||||
point it at "http://localhost:901/".</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected
|
||||
machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your
|
||||
connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent
|
||||
in the clear over the wire. </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN87"
|
||||
NAME="AEN115"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>LAUNCHING</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and
|
||||
point it at "http://localhost:901/".</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected
|
||||
machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your
|
||||
connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent
|
||||
in the clear over the wire. </P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN119"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>FILES</H2
|
||||
@ -335,7 +427,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN110"
|
||||
NAME="AEN142"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>WARNINGS</H2
|
||||
@ -365,17 +457,17 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN120"
|
||||
NAME="AEN152"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN123"
|
||||
NAME="AEN155"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -400,7 +492,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN133"
|
||||
NAME="AEN165"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -126,10 +126,20 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
names and before dumping the service definitions.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h</DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print usage message </P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-L servername</DT
|
||||
@ -222,7 +232,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN87"
|
||||
NAME="AEN92"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>FILES</H2
|
||||
@ -257,7 +267,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN100"
|
||||
NAME="AEN105"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DIAGNOSTICS</H2
|
||||
@ -271,7 +281,7 @@ NAME="AEN100"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN103"
|
||||
NAME="AEN108"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -282,7 +292,7 @@ NAME="AEN103"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN106"
|
||||
NAME="AEN111"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -304,7 +314,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN115"
|
||||
NAME="AEN120"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ NAME="AEN60"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
|
||||
>This man page is correct for version 3.0 of
|
||||
the Samba suite.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
|
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ CLASS="TITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN610"
|
||||
NAME="AEN674"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
>Introduction</H1
|
||||
@ -102,24 +102,24 @@ HREF="servertype.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN639"
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN703"
|
||||
>Stand Alone Server</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN646"
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN710"
|
||||
>Domain Member Server</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN652"
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN716"
|
||||
>Domain Controller</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>4.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN655"
|
||||
HREF="servertype.html#AEN719"
|
||||
>Domain Controller Types</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -135,34 +135,34 @@ HREF="securitylevels.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN681"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN752"
|
||||
>User and Share security level</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN684"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN755"
|
||||
>User Level Security</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN694"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN765"
|
||||
>Share Level Security</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN698"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN769"
|
||||
>Server Level Security</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN737"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN808"
|
||||
>Domain Level Security</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>5.1.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN758"
|
||||
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN829"
|
||||
>ADS Level Security</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -178,63 +178,63 @@ HREF="samba-pdc.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN785"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN859"
|
||||
>Prerequisite Reading</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN790"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN864"
|
||||
>Background</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN830"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN904"
|
||||
>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN872"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN946"
|
||||
>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the Domain</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.4.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN915"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN989"
|
||||
>Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.4.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN956"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1030"
|
||||
>"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.4.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN965"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1039"
|
||||
>Joining the Client to the Domain</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN980"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1054"
|
||||
>Common Problems and Errors</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1026"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1100"
|
||||
>What other help can I get?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.7. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1140"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1214"
|
||||
>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>6.7.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1163"
|
||||
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1237"
|
||||
>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -250,53 +250,53 @@ HREF="samba-bdc.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1193"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1267"
|
||||
>Prerequisite Reading</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1197"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1271"
|
||||
>Background</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1205"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1279"
|
||||
>What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1208"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1282"
|
||||
>How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.3.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1211"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1285"
|
||||
>When is the PDC needed?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1214"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1288"
|
||||
>Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT PDC?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1219"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1293"
|
||||
>How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.5.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1236"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1310"
|
||||
>How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>7.5.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1240"
|
||||
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1314"
|
||||
>Can I do this all with LDAP?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ HREF="ads.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1251"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1336"
|
||||
>Setup your <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf</TT
|
||||
@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1262"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1349"
|
||||
>Setup your <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>/etc/krb5.conf</TT
|
||||
@ -328,31 +328,31 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.3. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1273"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#ADS-CREATE-MACHINE-ACCOUNT"
|
||||
>Create the computer account</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.3.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1277"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1373"
|
||||
>Possible errors</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.4. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1285"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#ADS-TEST-SERVER"
|
||||
>Test your server setup</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.5. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1290"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#ADS-TEST-SMBCLIENT"
|
||||
>Testing with smbclient</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>8.6. <A
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1293"
|
||||
HREF="ads.html#AEN1390"
|
||||
>Notes</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
@ -366,12 +366,12 @@ HREF="domain-security.html"
|
||||
><DL
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>9.1. <A
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1315"
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1413"
|
||||
>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 3.0</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>9.2. <A
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1369"
|
||||
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1467"
|
||||
>Why is this better than security = server?</A
|
||||
></DT
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
|
@ -13,10 +13,10 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="System Policies"
|
||||
HREF="advancednetworkmanagement.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
|
||||
TITLE="Configuring Group Mapping"
|
||||
HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="advancednetworkmanagement.html"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="UNIX-PERMISSIONS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 11. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 10. UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1663"
|
||||
>11.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
|
||||
NAME="AEN1499"
|
||||
>10.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
|
||||
security dialogs</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -92,14 +92,46 @@ NAME="AEN1663"
|
||||
the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and
|
||||
still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba
|
||||
administrator can set.</P
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
></P
|
||||
><TABLE
|
||||
CLASS="NOTE"
|
||||
WIDTH="100%"
|
||||
BORDER="0"
|
||||
><TR
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="25"
|
||||
ALIGN="CENTER"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><IMG
|
||||
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/note.gif"
|
||||
HSPACE="5"
|
||||
ALT="Note"></TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
ALIGN="LEFT"
|
||||
VALIGN="TOP"
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> All access to Unix/Linux system file via Samba is controlled at
|
||||
the operating system file access control level. When trying to
|
||||
figure out file access problems it is vitally important to identify
|
||||
the identity of the Windows user as it is presented by Samba at
|
||||
the point of file access. This can best be determined from the
|
||||
Samba log files.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1667"
|
||||
>11.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1505"
|
||||
>10.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>From an NT4/2000/XP client, single-click with the right
|
||||
@ -167,8 +199,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1678"
|
||||
>11.3. Viewing file ownership</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1516"
|
||||
>10.3. Viewing file ownership</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Clicking on the <B
|
||||
@ -253,8 +285,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1698"
|
||||
>11.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1536"
|
||||
>10.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The third button is the <B
|
||||
@ -307,8 +339,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1713"
|
||||
>11.4.1. File Permissions</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1551"
|
||||
>10.4.1. File Permissions</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and
|
||||
@ -369,8 +401,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1727"
|
||||
>11.4.2. Directory Permissions</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1565"
|
||||
>10.4.2. Directory Permissions</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two
|
||||
@ -401,8 +433,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1734"
|
||||
>11.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1572"
|
||||
>10.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple
|
||||
@ -497,8 +529,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1756"
|
||||
>11.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
|
||||
NAME="AEN1594"
|
||||
>10.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
|
||||
parameters</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -691,8 +723,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN1810"
|
||||
>11.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
|
||||
NAME="AEN1648"
|
||||
>10.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
|
||||
mapping</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -750,7 +782,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="advancednetworkmanagement.html"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -778,7 +810,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>System Policies</TD
|
||||
>Advanced Configuration</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
@ -792,7 +824,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
|
||||
>Configuring Group Mapping</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -13,11 +13,11 @@ REL="UP"
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Configuration"
|
||||
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"><LINK
|
||||
TITLE="PAM Configuration for Centrally Managed Authentication"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Securing Samba"
|
||||
HREF="securing-samba.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="securing-samba.html"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="VFS"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 20. Stackable VFS modules</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 19. Stackable VFS modules</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3259"
|
||||
>20.1. Introduction and configuration</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3423"
|
||||
>19.1. Introduction and configuration</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Since samba 3.0, samba supports stackable VFS(Virtual File System) modules.
|
||||
@ -121,16 +121,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3268"
|
||||
>20.2. Included modules</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3432"
|
||||
>19.2. Included modules</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3270"
|
||||
>20.2.1. audit</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3434"
|
||||
>19.2.1. audit</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A simple module to audit file access to the syslog
|
||||
@ -167,8 +167,30 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3278"
|
||||
>20.2.2. recycle</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3442"
|
||||
>19.2.2. extd_audit</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This module is identical with the <SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="emphasis"
|
||||
><I
|
||||
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
|
||||
>audit</I
|
||||
></SPAN
|
||||
> module above except
|
||||
that it sends audit logs to both syslog as well as the smbd log file/s. The
|
||||
loglevel for this module is set in the smb.conf file. At loglevel = 0, only file
|
||||
and directory deletions and directory and file creations are logged. At loglevel = 1
|
||||
file opens are renames and permission changes are logged , while at loglevel = 2 file
|
||||
open and close calls are logged also.</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3446"
|
||||
>19.2.3. recycle</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A recycle-bin like modules. When used any unlink call
|
||||
@ -238,8 +260,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3315"
|
||||
>20.2.3. netatalk</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3483"
|
||||
>19.2.4. netatalk</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>A netatalk module, that will ease co-existence of samba and
|
||||
@ -271,8 +293,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3322"
|
||||
>20.3. VFS modules available elsewhere</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3490"
|
||||
>19.3. VFS modules available elsewhere</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This section contains a listing of various other VFS modules that
|
||||
@ -287,8 +309,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3326"
|
||||
>20.3.1. DatabaseFS</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3494"
|
||||
>19.3.1. DatabaseFS</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>URL: <A
|
||||
@ -321,8 +343,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3334"
|
||||
>20.3.2. vscan</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN3502"
|
||||
>19.3.2. vscan</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>URL: <A
|
||||
@ -355,7 +377,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
HREF="pam.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="P"
|
||||
>Prev</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -373,7 +395,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="securing-samba.html"
|
||||
HREF="msdfs.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -383,7 +405,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="left"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD
|
||||
>PAM Configuration for Centrally Managed Authentication</TD
|
||||
><TD
|
||||
WIDTH="34%"
|
||||
ALIGN="center"
|
||||
@ -397,7 +419,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Securing Samba</TD
|
||||
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -85,6 +85,54 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>'.client'</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is never removed
|
||||
by the client.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -124,22 +172,15 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>'.client'</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is never removed
|
||||
by the client.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
@ -147,7 +188,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN50"
|
||||
NAME="AEN66"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>COMMANDS</H2
|
||||
@ -468,7 +509,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN181"
|
||||
NAME="AEN197"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -479,7 +520,7 @@ NAME="AEN181"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN184"
|
||||
NAME="AEN200"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -37,12 +37,12 @@ NAME="AEN8"
|
||||
><B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>wbinfo</B
|
||||
> [-u] [-g] [-i ip] [-N netbios-name] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [-r user] [-a user%password] [-A user%password] [-p]</P
|
||||
> [-u] [-g] [-N netbios-name] [-I ip] [-n name] [-s sid] [-U uid] [-G gid] [-S sid] [-Y sid] [-t] [-m] [--sequence] [-r user] [-a user%password] [-A user%password] [--get-auth-user] [-p]</P
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN27"
|
||||
NAME="AEN29"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>DESCRIPTION</H2
|
||||
@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN43"
|
||||
NAME="AEN45"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>OPTIONS</H2
|
||||
@ -295,6 +295,13 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>--sequence</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Show sequence numbers of
|
||||
all known domains</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-r username</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -322,13 +329,46 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
Windows 2000 servers only).
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>--get-auth-user</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print username and password used by winbindd
|
||||
during session setup to a domain controller. Username
|
||||
and password can be set using '-A'. Only available for
|
||||
root.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-p</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Check whether winbindd is still alive.
|
||||
Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN147"
|
||||
NAME="AEN170"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXIT STATUS</H2
|
||||
@ -349,7 +389,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN154"
|
||||
NAME="AEN177"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -360,7 +400,7 @@ NAME="AEN154"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN157"
|
||||
NAME="AEN180"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -376,7 +416,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN163"
|
||||
NAME="AEN186"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
|
||||
TITLE="CUPS Printing Support"
|
||||
HREF="cups-printing.html"><LINK
|
||||
REL="NEXT"
|
||||
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"></HEAD
|
||||
TITLE="Advanced Network Manangement"
|
||||
HREF="advancednetworkmanagement.html"></HEAD
|
||||
><BODY
|
||||
CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
|
||||
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="bottom"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
HREF="advancednetworkmanagement.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -74,14 +74,14 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="WINBIND"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
>Chapter 16. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1
|
||||
>Chapter 14. Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</H1
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2573"
|
||||
>16.1. Abstract</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2469"
|
||||
>14.1. Abstract</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through
|
||||
@ -107,8 +107,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2577"
|
||||
>16.2. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2473"
|
||||
>14.2. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have
|
||||
@ -161,8 +161,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2590"
|
||||
>16.3. What Winbind Provides</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2486"
|
||||
>14.3. What Winbind Provides</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by
|
||||
@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2597"
|
||||
>16.3.1. Target Uses</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2493"
|
||||
>14.3.1. Target Uses</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an
|
||||
@ -227,8 +227,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2601"
|
||||
>16.4. How Winbind Works</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2497"
|
||||
>14.4. How Winbind Works</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The winbind system is designed around a client/server
|
||||
@ -247,8 +247,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2606"
|
||||
>16.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2502"
|
||||
>14.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Over the last few years, efforts have been underway
|
||||
@ -273,8 +273,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2610"
|
||||
>16.4.2. Microsoft Active Directory Services</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2506"
|
||||
>14.4.2. Microsoft Active Directory Services</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
> Since late 2001, Samba has gained the ability to
|
||||
@ -292,8 +292,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2613"
|
||||
>16.4.3. Name Service Switch</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2509"
|
||||
>14.4.3. Name Service Switch</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is
|
||||
@ -372,8 +372,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2629"
|
||||
>16.4.4. Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2525"
|
||||
>14.4.4. Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM,
|
||||
@ -421,8 +421,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2637"
|
||||
>16.4.5. User and Group ID Allocation</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2533"
|
||||
>14.4.5. User and Group ID Allocation</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>When a user or group is created under Windows NT
|
||||
@ -447,8 +447,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2641"
|
||||
>16.4.6. Result Caching</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2537"
|
||||
>14.4.6. Result Caching</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>An active system can generate a lot of user and group
|
||||
@ -470,8 +470,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2644"
|
||||
>16.5. Installation and Configuration</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2540"
|
||||
>14.5. Installation and Configuration</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Many thanks to John Trostel <A
|
||||
@ -489,8 +489,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2649"
|
||||
>16.5.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2545"
|
||||
>14.5.1. Introduction</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>This HOWTO describes the procedures used to get winbind up and
|
||||
@ -548,8 +548,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2662"
|
||||
>16.5.2. Requirements</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2558"
|
||||
>14.5.2. Requirements</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have a samba configuration file that you are currently
|
||||
@ -618,8 +618,8 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
CLASS="SECT2"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2676"
|
||||
>16.5.3. Testing Things Out</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2572"
|
||||
>14.5.3. Testing Things Out</A
|
||||
></H2
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Before starting, it is probably best to kill off all the SAMBA
|
||||
@ -663,8 +663,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2687"
|
||||
>16.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2583"
|
||||
>14.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The configuration and compilation of SAMBA is pretty straightforward.
|
||||
@ -729,8 +729,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2706"
|
||||
>16.5.3.2. Configure <TT
|
||||
NAME="AEN2602"
|
||||
>14.5.3.2. Configure <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>nsswitch.conf</TT
|
||||
> and the
|
||||
@ -834,8 +834,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2739"
|
||||
>16.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2635"
|
||||
>14.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Several parameters are needed in the smb.conf file to control
|
||||
@ -909,8 +909,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2755"
|
||||
>16.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2651"
|
||||
>14.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Enter the following command to make the SAMBA server join the
|
||||
@ -947,8 +947,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2766"
|
||||
>16.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2662"
|
||||
>14.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Eventually, you will want to modify your smb startup script to
|
||||
@ -1083,16 +1083,16 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2806"
|
||||
>16.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2702"
|
||||
>14.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2808"
|
||||
>16.5.3.6.1. Linux</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2704"
|
||||
>14.5.3.6.1. Linux</A
|
||||
></H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <B
|
||||
@ -1201,8 +1201,8 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2828"
|
||||
>16.5.3.6.2. Solaris</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2724"
|
||||
>14.5.3.6.2. Solaris</A
|
||||
></H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>On solaris, you need to modify the
|
||||
@ -1285,8 +1285,8 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2838"
|
||||
>16.5.3.6.3. Restarting</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2734"
|
||||
>14.5.3.6.3. Restarting</A
|
||||
></H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you restart the <B
|
||||
@ -1309,8 +1309,8 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><H3
|
||||
CLASS="SECT3"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2844"
|
||||
>16.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2740"
|
||||
>14.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</A
|
||||
></H3
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>If you have made it this far, you know that winbindd and samba are working
|
||||
@ -1367,8 +1367,8 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2861"
|
||||
>16.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2757"
|
||||
>14.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</A
|
||||
></H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The <TT
|
||||
@ -1496,8 +1496,8 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><H4
|
||||
CLASS="SECT4"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2894"
|
||||
>16.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2790"
|
||||
>14.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</A
|
||||
></H4
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The /etc/pam.conf needs to be changed. I changed this file so that my Domain
|
||||
@ -1583,8 +1583,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2901"
|
||||
>16.6. Limitations</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2797"
|
||||
>14.6. Limitations</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Winbind has a number of limitations in its current
|
||||
@ -1625,8 +1625,8 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><H1
|
||||
CLASS="SECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2911"
|
||||
>16.7. Conclusion</A
|
||||
NAME="AEN2807"
|
||||
>14.7. Conclusion</A
|
||||
></H1
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service
|
||||
@ -1671,7 +1671,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
|
||||
HREF="advancednetworkmanagement.html"
|
||||
ACCESSKEY="N"
|
||||
>Next</A
|
||||
></TD
|
||||
@ -1695,7 +1695,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
|
||||
WIDTH="33%"
|
||||
ALIGN="right"
|
||||
VALIGN="top"
|
||||
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD
|
||||
>Advanced Network Manangement</TD
|
||||
></TR
|
||||
></TABLE
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
|
@ -240,13 +240,90 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
than a file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d debuglevel</DT
|
||||
>-V</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Sets the debuglevel to an integer between
|
||||
0 and 100. 0 is for no debugging and 100 is for reams and
|
||||
reams. To submit a bug report to the Samba Team, use debug
|
||||
level 100 (see BUGS.txt). </P
|
||||
>Prints the version number for
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbd</B
|
||||
>.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s <configuration file></DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><VAR
|
||||
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
|
||||
>debuglevel</VAR
|
||||
> is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.</P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
>log
|
||||
level</A
|
||||
> parameter in the <A
|
||||
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
|
||||
TARGET="_top"
|
||||
><TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>smb.conf(5)</TT
|
||||
></A
|
||||
> file.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-l|--logfile=logbasename</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
<CODE
|
||||
CLASS="CONSTANT"
|
||||
>".client"</CODE
|
||||
> will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-h|--help</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-i</DT
|
||||
@ -292,29 +369,16 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
as 2 threads. The first will answer all requests from the cache,
|
||||
thus making responses to clients faster. The other will
|
||||
update the cache for the query that the first has just responded.
|
||||
Advantage of this is that responses are accurate and fast.
|
||||
Advantage of this is that responses stay accurate and are faster.
|
||||
</P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>-s|--conf=smb.conf</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Specifies the location of the all-important
|
||||
<SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
|
||||
><SPAN
|
||||
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
>smb.conf</SPAN
|
||||
>(5)</SPAN
|
||||
> file. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
></DL
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
></DIV
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN106"
|
||||
NAME="AEN126"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NAME AND ID RESOLUTION</H2
|
||||
@ -345,7 +409,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN112"
|
||||
NAME="AEN132"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>CONFIGURATION</H2
|
||||
@ -469,7 +533,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN156"
|
||||
NAME="AEN176"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>EXAMPLE SETUP</H2
|
||||
@ -524,7 +588,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>The next step is to join the domain. To do that use the
|
||||
<B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>smbpasswd</B
|
||||
>net</B
|
||||
> program like this: </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
><B
|
||||
@ -606,7 +670,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN194"
|
||||
NAME="AEN214"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>NOTES</H2
|
||||
@ -638,17 +702,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
> to become aware of new trust relationships between
|
||||
servers, it must be sent a SIGHUP signal. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>Client processes resolving names through the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
>
|
||||
nsswitch module read an environment variable named <VAR
|
||||
CLASS="ENVAR"
|
||||
> $WINBINDD_DOMAIN</VAR
|
||||
>. If this variable contains a comma separated
|
||||
list of Windows NT domain names, then winbindd will only resolve users
|
||||
and groups within those Windows NT domains. </P
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>PAM is really easy to misconfigure. Make sure you know what
|
||||
you are doing when modifying PAM configuration files. It is possible
|
||||
to set up PAM such that you can no longer log into your system. </P
|
||||
@ -667,7 +720,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN212"
|
||||
NAME="AEN229"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SIGNALS</H2
|
||||
@ -721,7 +774,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN231"
|
||||
NAME="AEN248"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>FILES</H2
|
||||
@ -760,6 +813,34 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
root. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged/pipe</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
>The UNIX pipe over which 'privilaged' clients
|
||||
communicate with the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>winbindd</B
|
||||
> program. For security
|
||||
reasons, access to some winbindd functions - like those needed by
|
||||
the <B
|
||||
CLASS="COMMAND"
|
||||
>ntlm_auth</B
|
||||
> utility - is restricted. By default,
|
||||
only users in the 'root' group will get this access, however the administrator
|
||||
may change the group permissions on $LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged to allow
|
||||
programs like 'squid' to use ntlm_auth.
|
||||
Note that the winbind client will only attempt to connect to the winbindd daemon
|
||||
if both the <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged</TT
|
||||
> directory
|
||||
and <TT
|
||||
CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
>$LOCKDIR/winbindd_privilaged/pipe</TT
|
||||
> file are owned by
|
||||
root. </P
|
||||
></DD
|
||||
><DT
|
||||
>/lib/libnss_winbind.so.X</DT
|
||||
><DD
|
||||
><P
|
||||
@ -795,7 +876,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN260"
|
||||
NAME="AEN285"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>VERSION</H2
|
||||
@ -806,7 +887,7 @@ NAME="AEN260"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN263"
|
||||
NAME="AEN288"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>SEE ALSO</H2
|
||||
@ -837,7 +918,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
|
||||
><DIV
|
||||
CLASS="REFSECT1"
|
||||
><A
|
||||
NAME="AEN276"
|
||||
NAME="AEN301"
|
||||
></A
|
||||
><H2
|
||||
>AUTHOR</H2
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
findsmb \- list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
lmhosts \- The Samba NetBIOS hosts file
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "NET" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "NET" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
net \- Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers.
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "NMBD" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "NMBD" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
nmbd \- NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS over IP naming services to clients
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
nmblookup \- NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
pdbedit \- manage the SAM database
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
rpcclient \- tool for executing client side MS-RPC functions
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SAMBA" "7" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SAMBA" "7" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
Samba \- A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite
|
||||
@ -925,6 +925,9 @@ each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
|
||||
\fIsecurity\fR
|
||||
.TP 0.2i
|
||||
\(bu
|
||||
\fIserver schannel\fR
|
||||
.TP 0.2i
|
||||
\(bu
|
||||
\fIserver string\fR
|
||||
.TP 0.2i
|
||||
\(bu
|
||||
@ -6105,6 +6108,26 @@ Default: \fBsecurity mask = 0777\fR
|
||||
|
||||
Example: \fBsecurity mask = 0770\fR
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB>server schannel (G)\fR
|
||||
This controls whether the server offers or even
|
||||
demands the use of the netlogon schannel.
|
||||
\fIserver schannel = no\fR does not
|
||||
offer the schannel, \fIserver schannel =
|
||||
auto\fR offers the schannel but does not
|
||||
enforce it, and \fIserver schannel =
|
||||
yes\fR denies access if the client is not
|
||||
able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case
|
||||
for Windows NT4 before SP4.
|
||||
|
||||
Please note that with this set to
|
||||
\fIno\fR you will have to apply the
|
||||
WindowsXP requireSignOrSeal-Registry patch found in
|
||||
the docs/Registry subdirectory.
|
||||
|
||||
Default: \fBserver schannel = auto\fR
|
||||
|
||||
Example: \fBserver schannel = yes\fR/para>
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB>server string (G)\fR
|
||||
This controls what string will show up in the
|
||||
printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbcacls \- Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names
|
||||
@ -74,6 +74,50 @@ and masks to a readable string format.
|
||||
\fB-t\fR
|
||||
Don't actually do anything, only validate the correctness of
|
||||
the arguments.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-h|--help\fR
|
||||
Print a summary of command line options.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-V\fR
|
||||
Prints the version number for
|
||||
\fBsmbd\fR.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-s <configuration file>\fR
|
||||
The file specified contains the
|
||||
configuration details required by the server. The
|
||||
information in this file includes server-specific
|
||||
information such as what printcap file to use, as well
|
||||
as descriptions of all the services that the server is
|
||||
to provide. See \fIsmb.conf(5)\fR for more information.
|
||||
The default configuration file name is determined at
|
||||
compile time.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-d|--debug=debuglevel\fR
|
||||
\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer
|
||||
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
|
||||
not specified is zero.
|
||||
|
||||
The higher this value, the more detail will be
|
||||
logged to the log files about the activities of the
|
||||
server. At level 0, only critical errors and serious
|
||||
warnings will be logged. Level 1 is a reasonable level for
|
||||
day to day running - it generates a small amount of
|
||||
information about operations carried out.
|
||||
|
||||
Levels above 1 will generate considerable
|
||||
amounts of log data, and should only be used when
|
||||
investigating a problem. Levels above 3 are designed for
|
||||
use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log
|
||||
data, most of which is extremely cryptic.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that specifying this parameter here will
|
||||
override the log
|
||||
level file.
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
\fB-l|--logfile=logbasename\fR
|
||||
File name for log/debug files. The extension
|
||||
".client" will be appended. The log file is
|
||||
never removed by the client.
|
||||
.SH "ACL FORMAT"
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The format of an ACL is one or more ACL entries separated by
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbclient \- ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbcontrol \- send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBD" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBD" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbd \- server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBGROUPEDIT" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBGROUPEDIT" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbgroupedit \- Query/set/change UNIX - Windows NT group mapping
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBMNT" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBMNT" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbmnt \- helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBMOUNT" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBMOUNT" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbmount \- mount an smbfs filesystem
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbpasswd \- The Samba encrypted password file
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbpasswd \- change a user's SMB password
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBSH" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBSH" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbsh \- Allows access to Windows NT filesystem using UNIX commands
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbspool \- send a print file to an SMB printer
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbstatus \- report on current Samba connections
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbtar \- shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SMBUMOUNT" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SMBUMOUNT" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
smbumount \- smbfs umount for normal users
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "SWAT" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "SWAT" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
swat \- Samba Web Administration Tool
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "TESTPARM" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "TESTPARM" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
testparm \- check an smb.conf configuration file for internal correctness
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "TESTPRNS" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "TESTPRNS" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
testprns \- check printer name for validity with smbd
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "VFSTEST" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "VFSTEST" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
vfstest \- tool for testing samba VFS modules
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "WBINFO" "1" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "WBINFO" "1" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
wbinfo \- Query information from winbind daemon
|
||||
|
@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
|
||||
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
|
||||
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
|
||||
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
|
||||
.TH "WINBINDD" "8" "03 april 2003" "" ""
|
||||
.TH "WINBINDD" "8" "06 April 2003" "" ""
|
||||
|
||||
.SH NAME
|
||||
winbindd \- Name Service Switch daemon for resolving names from NT servers
|
||||
|
Loading…
x
Reference in New Issue
Block a user